rpms/ncurses
2
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Pull Requests Packages Projects Releases Wiki Activity
9b69507f87
ncurses/ncurses-6.0-20170107.patch

6072 lines
328 KiB
Diff
Raw Blame History

# ncurses 6.0 - patch 20170107 - Thomas E. Dickey
#
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
#
# Ncurses 6.0 is at
# ftp.gnu.org:/pub/gnu
#
# Patches for ncurses 6.0 can be found at
# ftp://invisible-island.net/ncurses/6.0
# http://invisible-mirror.net/archives/ncurses/6.0
#
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# ftp://invisible-island.net/ncurses/6.0/ncurses-6.0-20170107.patch.gz
# patch by Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@invisible-island.net>
# created Sun Jan 8 01:40:29 UTC 2017
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Ada95/package/debian/copyright | 4
# COPYING | 4
# NEWS | 21
# VERSION | 2
# dist.mk | 6
# doc/html/man/adacurses6-config.1.html | 2
# doc/html/man/captoinfo.1m.html | 2
# doc/html/man/clear.1.html | 2
# doc/html/man/curs_add_wch.3x.html | 22
# doc/html/man/curs_addch.3x.html | 16
# doc/html/man/curs_attr.3x.html | 6
# doc/html/man/curs_color.3x.html | 6
# doc/html/man/curs_get_wstr.3x.html | 18
# doc/html/man/curs_getch.3x.html | 4
# doc/html/man/curs_getstr.3x.html | 6
# doc/html/man/curs_initscr.3x.html | 22
# doc/html/man/curs_inopts.3x.html | 60 -
# doc/html/man/curs_kernel.3x.html | 6
# doc/html/man/curs_memleaks.3x.html | 27
# doc/html/man/curs_mouse.3x.html | 10
# doc/html/man/curs_move.3x.html | 10
# doc/html/man/curs_outopts.3x.html | 6
# doc/html/man/curs_pad.3x.html | 10
# doc/html/man/curs_print.3x.html | 4
# doc/html/man/curs_printw.3x.html | 6
# doc/html/man/curs_scr_dump.3x.html | 12
# doc/html/man/curs_sp_funcs.3x.html | 4
# doc/html/man/curs_termcap.3x.html | 8
# doc/html/man/curs_trace.3x.html | 6
# doc/html/man/curs_util.3x.html | 178 ++---
# doc/html/man/curs_variables.3x.html | 2
# doc/html/man/form.3x.html | 2
# doc/html/man/form_driver.3x.html | 6
# doc/html/man/form_post.3x.html | 6
# doc/html/man/form_variables.3x.html | 2
# doc/html/man/infocmp.1m.html | 2
# doc/html/man/infotocap.1m.html | 2
# doc/html/man/menu.3x.html | 2
# doc/html/man/menu_driver.3x.html | 8
# doc/html/man/menu_post.3x.html | 6
# doc/html/man/ncurses.3x.html | 20
# doc/html/man/ncurses6-config.1.html | 2
# doc/html/man/panel.3x.html | 2
# doc/html/man/resizeterm.3x.html | 10
# doc/html/man/tabs.1.html | 2
# doc/html/man/term.5.html | 10
# doc/html/man/term_variables.3x.html | 35 -
# doc/html/man/terminfo.5.html | 1028 ++++++++++++++++----------------
# doc/html/man/tic.1m.html | 2
# doc/html/man/toe.1m.html | 2
# doc/html/man/tput.1.html | 277 +++++---
# doc/html/man/tset.1.html | 192 +++--
# man/curs_add_wch.3x | 6
# man/curs_addch.3x | 8
# man/curs_attr.3x | 6
# man/curs_color.3x | 6
# man/curs_get_wstr.3x | 6
# man/curs_getstr.3x | 6
# man/curs_initscr.3x | 10
# man/curs_inopts.3x | 14
# man/curs_kernel.3x | 6
# man/curs_memleaks.3x | 6
# man/curs_mouse.3x | 8
# man/curs_move.3x | 6
# man/curs_outopts.3x | 6
# man/curs_pad.3x | 6
# man/curs_print.3x | 6
# man/curs_printw.3x | 6
# man/curs_scr_dump.3x | 6
# man/curs_termcap.3x | 6
# man/curs_trace.3x | 6
# man/curs_util.3x | 47 -
# man/form_post.3x | 6
# man/manhtml.aliases | 14
# man/menu_driver.3x | 6
# man/menu_post.3x | 6
# man/ncurses.3x | 8
# man/resizeterm.3x | 6
# man/term.5 | 6
# man/term_variables.3x | 8
# man/terminfo.tail | 8
# man/tput.1 | 91 ++
# man/tset.1 | 61 +
# ncurses/base/MKlib_gen.sh | 7
# ncurses/curses.priv.h | 13
# ncurses/tinfo/MKfallback.sh | 8
# ncurses/tinfo/lib_data.c | 9
# ncurses/tinfo/lib_setup.c | 29
# ncurses/tinfo/tinfo_driver.c | 6
# ncurses/widechar/lib_key_name.c | 15
# package/debian-mingw/changelog | 4
# package/debian-mingw/copyright | 4
# package/debian-mingw64/changelog | 4
# package/debian-mingw64/copyright | 4
# package/debian/changelog | 4
# package/debian/copyright | 4
# package/mingw-ncurses.nsi | 6
# package/mingw-ncurses.spec | 2
# package/ncurses.spec | 2
# progs/tput.c | 12
# progs/tset.c | 6
# test/package/debian-mingw/copyright | 4
# test/package/debian-mingw64/copyright | 4
# test/package/debian/copyright | 4
# 104 files changed, 1458 insertions(+), 1200 deletions(-)
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Index: Ada95/package/debian/copyright
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/Ada95/package/debian/copyright 2016-01-02 20:24:37.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/Ada95/package/debian/copyright 2017-01-08 00:35:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -4,11 +4,11 @@
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Files: *
-Copyright: 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright: 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Licence: X11
Files: aclocal.m4 package
-Copyright: 2010-2015,2016 by Thomas E. Dickey
+Copyright: 2010-2016,2017 by Thomas E. Dickey
Licence: X11
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
Index: COPYING
Prereq: 1.4
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/COPYING 2016-01-02 20:24:37.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/COPYING 2017-01-08 00:33:50.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
@@ -25,4 +25,4 @@
authorization.
-- vile:txtmode fc=72
--- $Id: COPYING,v 1.4 2016/01/02 20:24:37 tom Exp $
+-- $Id: COPYING,v 1.5 2017/01/08 00:33:50 tom Exp $
Index: NEWS
Prereq: 1.2722
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/NEWS 2016-12-31 21:35:53.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/NEWS 2017-01-07 22:49:11.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--- Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. --
+-- Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. --
-- --
-- Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a --
-- copy of this software and associated documentation files (the --
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
-- sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written --
-- authorization. --
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--- $Id: NEWS,v 1.2722 2016/12/31 21:35:53 tom Exp $
+-- $Id: NEWS,v 1.2732 2017/01/07 22:49:11 tom Exp $
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This is a log of changes that ncurses has gone through since Zeyd started
@@ -45,6 +45,23 @@
Changes through 1.9.9e did not credit all contributions;
it is not possible to add this information.
+20170107
+ + amend changes for tput to reset tty modes to "sane" if the program
+ is run as "reset", like tset. Likewise, ensure that tset sends
+ either reset- or init-strings.
+ + improve manual page descriptions of tput init/reset and tset/reset,
+ to make it easier to see how they are similar and different.
+ + move a static result from key_name() to _nc_globals
+ + modify _nc_get_screensize to allow for use_env() and use_tioctl()
+ state to be per-screen when sp-funcs are configured, better matching
+ the behavior when using the term-driver configuration.
+ + improve cross-references in manual pages for often used functions
+ + move SCREEN field for use_tioctl() data before the ncursesw fields,
+ and limit that to the sp-funcs configuration to improve termlib
+ compatibility (cf: 20120714).
+ + correct order of initialization for traces in use_env() and
+ use_tioctl() versus first trace calls.
+
20161231
+ fix errata for ncurses-howto (report by Damien Ruscoe).
+ fix a few places in configure/build scripts where DESTDIR and rpath
Index: VERSION
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/VERSION 2016-12-31 12:01:55.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/VERSION 2017-01-07 15:27:12.000000000 +0000
@@ -1 +1 @@
-5:0:9 6.0 20161231
+5:0:9 6.0 20170107
Index: dist.mk
Prereq: 1.1139
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/dist.mk 2016-12-31 12:01:55.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/dist.mk 2017-01-07 15:27:12.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
##############################################################################
-# Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. #
+# Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. #
# #
# Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a #
# copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), #
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
# use or other dealings in this Software without prior written #
# authorization. #
##############################################################################
-# $Id: dist.mk,v 1.1139 2016/12/31 12:01:55 tom Exp $
+# $Id: dist.mk,v 1.1141 2017/01/07 15:27:12 tom Exp $
# Makefile for creating ncurses distributions.
#
# This only needs to be used directly as a makefile by developers, but
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
# These define the major/minor/patch versions of ncurses.
NCURSES_MAJOR = 6
NCURSES_MINOR = 0
-NCURSES_PATCH = 20161231
+NCURSES_PATCH = 20170107
# We don't append the patch to the version, since this only applies to releases
VERSION = $(NCURSES_MAJOR).$(NCURSES_MINOR)
Index: doc/html/man/adacurses6-config.1.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/adacurses6-config.1.html 2016-12-31 21:41:33.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/adacurses6-config.1.html 2017-01-07 20:05:39.000000000 +0000
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-SEE-ALSO">SEE ALSO</a></H2><PRE>
<STRONG><A HREF="ncurses.3x.html">curses(3x)</A></STRONG>
- This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20161231).
+ This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20170107).
Index: doc/html/man/captoinfo.1m.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/captoinfo.1m.html 2016-12-31 21:41:33.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/captoinfo.1m.html 2017-01-07 20:05:39.000000000 +0000
@@ -198,7 +198,7 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-SEE-ALSO">SEE ALSO</a></H2><PRE>
<STRONG><A HREF="infocmp.1m.html">infocmp(1m)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="ncurses.3x.html">curses(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="terminfo.5.html">terminfo(5)</A></STRONG>
- This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20161231).
+ This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20170107).
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-AUTHOR">AUTHOR</a></H2><PRE>
Index: doc/html/man/clear.1.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/clear.1.html 2016-12-31 21:41:33.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/clear.1.html 2017-01-07 20:05:39.000000000 +0000
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-SEE-ALSO">SEE ALSO</a></H2><PRE>
<STRONG><A HREF="tput.1.html">tput(1)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="terminfo.5.html">terminfo(5)</A></STRONG>
- This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20161231).
+ This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20170107).
Index: doc/html/man/curs_add_wch.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_add_wch.3x.html 2016-01-30 19:24:51.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_add_wch.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:25.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 2001-2012,2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 2001-2015,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: curs_add_wch.3x,v 1.16 2015/07/20 23:44:56 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: curs_add_wch.3x,v 1.17 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -91,20 +91,20 @@
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-echo_wchar">echo_wchar</a></H3><PRE>
The <STRONG>echo_wchar</STRONG> function is functionally equivalent to a
- call to <STRONG>add_wch</STRONG> followed by a call to <STRONG>refresh</STRONG>. Similarly,
- the <STRONG>wecho_wchar</STRONG> is functionally equivalent to a call to
- <STRONG>wadd_wch</STRONG> followed by a call to <STRONG>wrefresh</STRONG>. The knowledge
- that only a single character is being output is taken into
- consideration and, for non-control characters, a consider-
- able performance gain might be seen by using the *<STRONG>echo</STRONG>*
- functions instead of their equivalents.
+ call to <STRONG>add_wch</STRONG> followed by a call to <STRONG><A HREF="curs_refresh.3x.html">refresh(3x)</A></STRONG>. Simi-
+ larly, the <STRONG>wecho_wchar</STRONG> is functionally equivalent to a
+ call to <STRONG>wadd_wch</STRONG> followed by a call to <STRONG>wrefresh</STRONG>. The
+ knowledge that only a single character is being output is
+ taken into consideration and, for non-control characters,
+ a considerable performance gain might be seen by using the
+ *<STRONG>echo</STRONG>* functions instead of their equivalents.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Line-Graphics">Line Graphics</a></H3><PRE>
- Like <STRONG><A HREF="curs_addch.3x.html">curs_addch(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG>addch_wch</STRONG> accepts symbols which make it
+ Like <STRONG><A HREF="curs_addch.3x.html">addch(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG>addch_wch</STRONG> accepts symbols which make it
simple to draw lines and other frequently used special
characters. These symbols correspond to the same VT100
- line-drawing set as <STRONG><A HREF="curs_addch.3x.html">curs_addch(3x)</A></STRONG>.
+ line-drawing set as <STRONG><A HREF="curs_addch.3x.html">addch(3x)</A></STRONG>.
<EM>Name</EM> <EM>Unicode</EM> <EM>Default</EM> <EM>Description</EM>
----------------------------------------------------------------
Index: doc/html/man/curs_addch.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_addch.3x.html 2016-01-30 19:24:51.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_addch.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:25.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
<!--
* t
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2014,2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: curs_addch.3x,v 1.37 2015/09/05 21:13:25 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: curs_addch.3x,v 1.38 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@
Video attributes can be combined with a character argument
passed to <STRONG>addch</STRONG> or related functions by logical-ORing them
into the character. (Thus, text, including attributes,
- can be copied from one place to another using <STRONG>inch</STRONG> and
+ can be copied from one place to another using <STRONG><A HREF="curs_inch.3x.html">inch(3x)</A></STRONG> and
<STRONG>addch</STRONG>.) See the <STRONG><A HREF="curs_attr.3x.html">curs_attr(3x)</A></STRONG> page for values of prede-
fined video attribute constants that can be usefully OR'ed
into characters.
@@ -117,11 +117,11 @@
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Echoing-characters">Echoing characters</a></H3><PRE>
The <STRONG>echochar</STRONG> and <STRONG>wechochar</STRONG> routines are equivalent to a
- call to <STRONG>addch</STRONG> followed by a call to <STRONG>refresh</STRONG>, or a call to
- <STRONG>waddch</STRONG> followed by a call to <STRONG>wrefresh</STRONG>. The knowledge that
- only a single character is being output is used and, for
- non-control characters, a considerable performance gain
- may be seen by using these routines instead of their
+ call to <STRONG>addch</STRONG> followed by a call to <STRONG><A HREF="curs_refresh.3x.html">refresh(3x)</A></STRONG>, or a call
+ to <STRONG>waddch</STRONG> followed by a call to <STRONG>wrefresh</STRONG>. The knowledge
+ that only a single character is being output is used and,
+ for non-control characters, a considerable performance
+ gain may be seen by using these routines instead of their
equivalents.
Index: doc/html/man/curs_attr.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_attr.3x.html 2016-10-15 23:12:20.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_attr.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:05:39.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
<!--
* t
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: curs_attr.3x,v 1.48 2016/10/15 17:09:05 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: curs_attr.3x,v 1.49 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
* attr_get
* .br
* .br
@@ -172,7 +172,7 @@
does a cursor move before acting.
In these functions, the color <EM>pair</EM> argument is a color-
- pair index (as in the first argument of <EM>init</EM><STRONG>_</STRONG><EM>pair</EM>, see
+ pair index (as in the first argument of <STRONG>init_pair</STRONG>, see
<STRONG><A HREF="curs_color.3x.html">curs_color(3x)</A></STRONG>). The <STRONG>opts</STRONG> argument is not presently used,
but is reserved for the future (leave it <STRONG>NULL</STRONG>).
Index: doc/html/man/curs_color.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_color.3x.html 2016-10-15 23:12:20.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_color.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:05:39.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: curs_color.3x,v 1.45 2016/10/15 17:10:19 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: curs_color.3x,v 1.46 2017/01/07 19:57:48 tom Exp @
* .br
* .br
* .br
@@ -330,7 +330,7 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-NOTES">NOTES</a></H2><PRE>
- In the <EM>ncurses</EM> implementation, there is a separate color
+ In the <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> implementation, there is a separate color
activation flag, color palette, color pairs table, and as-
sociated COLORS and COLOR_PAIRS counts for each screen;
the <STRONG>start_color</STRONG> function only affects the current screen.
Index: doc/html/man/curs_get_wstr.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_get_wstr.3x.html 2016-01-30 19:24:52.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_get_wstr.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:26.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 2002-2010,2012 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 2002-2012,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: curs_get_wstr.3x,v 1.9 2012/11/03 23:03:59 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: curs_get_wstr.3x,v 1.10 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -66,13 +66,13 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-DESCRIPTION">DESCRIPTION</a></H2><PRE>
The effect of <STRONG>get_wstr</STRONG> is as though a series of calls to
- <STRONG>get_wch</STRONG> were made, until a newline, other end-of-line, or
- end-of-file condition is processed. An end-of-file condi-
- tion is represented by <STRONG>WEOF</STRONG>, as defined in <STRONG>&lt;wchar.h&gt;</STRONG>. The
- newline and end-of-line conditions are represented by the
- <STRONG>\n</STRONG> <STRONG>wchar_t</STRONG> value. In all instances, the end of the string
- is terminated by a null <STRONG>wchar_t</STRONG>. The routine places re-
- sulting values in the area pointed to by <EM>wstr</EM>.
+ <STRONG><A HREF="curs_get_wch.3x.html">get_wch(3x)</A></STRONG> were made, until a newline, other end-of-line,
+ or end-of-file condition is processed. An end-of-file
+ condition is represented by <STRONG>WEOF</STRONG>, as defined in <STRONG>&lt;wchar.h&gt;</STRONG>.
+ The newline and end-of-line conditions are represented by
+ the <STRONG>\n</STRONG> <STRONG>wchar_t</STRONG> value. In all instances, the end of the
+ string is terminated by a null <STRONG>wchar_t</STRONG>. The routine
+ places resulting values in the area pointed to by <EM>wstr</EM>.
The user's erase and kill characters are interpreted. If
keypad mode is on for the window, <STRONG>KEY_LEFT</STRONG> and
Index: doc/html/man/curs_getch.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_getch.3x.html 2016-10-15 23:12:20.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_getch.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:26.000000000 +0000
@@ -266,13 +266,13 @@
real key:
<STRONG>o</STRONG> <STRONG>KEY_RESIZE</STRONG> is returned when the <STRONG>SIGWINCH</STRONG> signal has
- been detected (see <STRONG><A HREF="curs_initscr.3x.html">curs_initscr(3x)</A></STRONG> and <STRONG><A HREF="resizeterm.3x.html">resizeterm(3x)</A></STRONG>).
+ been detected (see <STRONG><A HREF="curs_initscr.3x.html">initscr(3x)</A></STRONG> and <STRONG><A HREF="resizeterm.3x.html">resizeterm(3x)</A></STRONG>).
This code is returned whether or not <STRONG>keypad</STRONG> has been
enabled.
<STRONG>o</STRONG> <STRONG>KEY_MOUSE</STRONG> is returned for mouse-events (see
<STRONG><A HREF="curs_mouse.3x.html">curs_mouse(3x)</A></STRONG>). This code relies upon whether or not
- <STRONG><A HREF="keypad.3x.html">keypad(3x)</A></STRONG> has been enabled, because (e.g., with <EM>xterm</EM>
+ <STRONG><A HREF="curs_inopts.3x.html">keypad(3x)</A></STRONG> has been enabled, because (e.g., with <EM>xterm</EM>
mouse prototocol) ncurses must read escape sequences,
just like a function key.
Index: doc/html/man/curs_getstr.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_getstr.3x.html 2016-01-30 19:24:52.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_getstr.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:26.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2005,2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2010,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: curs_getstr.3x,v 1.19 2010/12/04 18:36:44 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: curs_getstr.3x,v 1.20 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@
Issue 4. They read single-byte characters only. The
standard does not define any error conditions. This im-
plementation returns ERR if the window pointer is null, or
- if the lower-level <STRONG>wgetch</STRONG> call returns an ERR.
+ if the lower-level <STRONG><A HREF="curs_getch.3x.html">wgetch(3x)</A></STRONG> call returns an ERR.
SVr3 and early SVr4 curses implementations did not reject
function keys; the SVr4.0 documentation claimed that "spe-
Index: doc/html/man/curs_initscr.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_initscr.3x.html 2016-10-15 23:12:20.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_initscr.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:26.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: curs_initscr.3x,v 1.25 2016/10/15 17:02:31 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: curs_initscr.3x,v 1.26 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -66,16 +66,16 @@
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-initscr">initscr</a></H3><PRE>
<STRONG>initscr</STRONG> is normally the first <STRONG>curses</STRONG> routine to call when
initializing a program. A few special routines sometimes
- need to be called before it; these are <STRONG>slk_init</STRONG>, <STRONG>filter</STRONG>,
- <STRONG>ripoffline</STRONG>, <STRONG>use_env</STRONG>. For multiple-terminal applications,
- <STRONG>newterm</STRONG> may be called before <STRONG>initscr</STRONG>.
+ need to be called before it; these are <STRONG><A HREF="curs_slk.3x.html">slk_init(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG>fil-</STRONG>
+ <STRONG>ter</STRONG>, <STRONG>ripoffline</STRONG>, <STRONG>use_env</STRONG>. For multiple-terminal applica-
+ tions, <STRONG>newterm</STRONG> may be called before <STRONG>initscr</STRONG>.
The initscr code determines the terminal type and initial-
izes all <STRONG>curses</STRONG> data structures. <STRONG>initscr</STRONG> also causes the
- first call to <STRONG>refresh</STRONG> to clear the screen. If errors oc-
- cur, <STRONG>initscr</STRONG> writes an appropriate error message to stan-
- dard error and exits; otherwise, a pointer is returned to
- <STRONG>stdscr</STRONG>.
+ first call to <STRONG><A HREF="curs_refresh.3x.html">refresh(3x)</A></STRONG> to clear the screen. If errors
+ occur, <STRONG>initscr</STRONG> writes an appropriate error message to
+ standard error and exits; otherwise, a pointer is returned
+ to <STRONG>stdscr</STRONG>.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-newterm">newterm</a></H3><PRE>
@@ -115,8 +115,8 @@
<STRONG>o</STRONG> resets the terminal into the proper non-visual mode.
- Calling <STRONG>refresh</STRONG> or <STRONG>doupdate</STRONG> after a temporary escape caus-
- es the program to resume visual mode.
+ Calling <STRONG><A HREF="curs_refresh.3x.html">refresh(3x)</A></STRONG> or <STRONG>doupdate</STRONG> after a temporary escape
+ causes the program to resume visual mode.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-isendwin">isendwin</a></H3><PRE>
Index: doc/html/man/curs_inopts.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_inopts.3x.html 2016-10-22 20:13:53.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_inopts.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:26.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: curs_inopts.3x,v 1.23 2016/10/22 19:54:35 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: curs_inopts.3x,v 1.24 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -103,14 +103,14 @@
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-echo_noecho">echo/noecho</a></H3><PRE>
The <STRONG>echo</STRONG> and <STRONG>noecho</STRONG> routines control whether characters
- typed by the user are echoed by <STRONG>getch</STRONG> as they are typed.
- Echoing by the tty driver is always disabled, but initial-
- ly <STRONG>getch</STRONG> is in echo mode, so characters typed are echoed.
- Authors of most interactive programs prefer to do their
- own echoing in a controlled area of the screen, or not to
- echo at all, so they disable echoing by calling <STRONG>noecho</STRONG>.
- [See <STRONG><A HREF="curs_getch.3x.html">curs_getch(3x)</A></STRONG> for a discussion of how these routines
- interact with <STRONG>cbreak</STRONG> and <STRONG>nocbreak</STRONG>.]
+ typed by the user are echoed by <STRONG><A HREF="curs_getch.3x.html">getch(3x)</A></STRONG> as they are
+ typed. Echoing by the tty driver is always disabled, but
+ initially <STRONG>getch</STRONG> is in echo mode, so characters typed are
+ echoed. Authors of most interactive programs prefer to do
+ their own echoing in a controlled area of the screen, or
+ not to echo at all, so they disable echoing by calling
+ <STRONG>noecho</STRONG>. [See <STRONG><A HREF="curs_getch.3x.html">curs_getch(3x)</A></STRONG> for a discussion of how these
+ routines interact with <STRONG>cbreak</STRONG> and <STRONG>nocbreak</STRONG>.]
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-halfdelay">halfdelay</a></H3><PRE>
@@ -138,15 +138,15 @@
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-keypad">keypad</a></H3><PRE>
The <STRONG>keypad</STRONG> option enables the keypad of the user's termi-
nal. If enabled (<EM>bf</EM> is <STRONG>TRUE</STRONG>), the user can press a func-
- tion key (such as an arrow key) and <STRONG>wgetch</STRONG> returns a sin-
- gle value representing the function key, as in <STRONG>KEY_LEFT</STRONG>.
- If disabled (<EM>bf</EM> is <STRONG>FALSE</STRONG>), <STRONG>curses</STRONG> does not treat function
- keys specially and the program has to interpret the escape
- sequences itself. If the keypad in the terminal can be
- turned on (made to transmit) and off (made to work local-
- ly), turning on this option causes the terminal keypad to
- be turned on when <STRONG>wgetch</STRONG> is called. The default value for
- keypad is <STRONG>FALSE</STRONG>.
+ tion key (such as an arrow key) and <STRONG><A HREF="curs_getch.3x.html">wgetch(3x)</A></STRONG> returns a
+ single value representing the function key, as in
+ <STRONG>KEY_LEFT</STRONG>. If disabled (<EM>bf</EM> is <STRONG>FALSE</STRONG>), <STRONG>curses</STRONG> does not
+ treat function keys specially and the program has to in-
+ terpret the escape sequences itself. If the keypad in the
+ terminal can be turned on (made to transmit) and off (made
+ to work locally), turning on this option causes the termi-
+ nal keypad to be turned on when <STRONG><A HREF="curs_getch.3x.html">wgetch(3x)</A></STRONG> is called. The
+ default value for keypad is <STRONG>FALSE</STRONG>.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-meta">meta</a></H3><PRE>
@@ -169,9 +169,9 @@
If no input is ready, <STRONG>getch</STRONG> returns <STRONG>ERR</STRONG>. If disabled (<EM>bf</EM>
is <STRONG>FALSE</STRONG>), <STRONG>getch</STRONG> waits until a key is pressed.
- While interpreting an input escape sequence, <STRONG>wgetch</STRONG> sets a
- timer while waiting for the next character. If <STRONG>notime-</STRONG>
- <STRONG>out(</STRONG><EM>win</EM>, <STRONG>TRUE</STRONG>) is called, then <STRONG>wgetch</STRONG> does not set a
+ While interpreting an input escape sequence, <STRONG><A HREF="curs_getch.3x.html">wgetch(3x)</A></STRONG>
+ sets a timer while waiting for the next character. If <STRONG>no-</STRONG>
+ <STRONG>timeout(</STRONG><EM>win</EM>, <STRONG>TRUE</STRONG>) is called, then <STRONG>wgetch</STRONG> does not set a
timer. The purpose of the timeout is to differentiate be-
tween sequences received from a function key and those
typed by a user.
@@ -215,14 +215,14 @@
The <STRONG>curses</STRONG> library does "line-breakout optimization" by
looking for typeahead periodically while updating the
screen. If input is found, and it is coming from a tty,
- the current update is postponed until <STRONG>refresh</STRONG> or <STRONG>doupdate</STRONG>
- is called again. This allows faster response to commands
- typed in advance. Normally, the input FILE pointer passed
- to <STRONG>newterm</STRONG>, or <STRONG>stdin</STRONG> in the case that <STRONG>initscr</STRONG> was used,
- will be used to do this typeahead checking. The <STRONG>typeahead</STRONG>
- routine specifies that the file descriptor <EM>fd</EM> is to be
- used to check for typeahead instead. If <EM>fd</EM> is -1, then no
- typeahead checking is done.
+ the current update is postponed until <STRONG><A HREF="curs_refresh.3x.html">refresh(3x)</A></STRONG> or <STRONG>doup-</STRONG>
+ <STRONG>date</STRONG> is called again. This allows faster response to com-
+ mands typed in advance. Normally, the input FILE pointer
+ passed to <STRONG>newterm</STRONG>, or <STRONG>stdin</STRONG> in the case that <STRONG>initscr</STRONG> was
+ used, will be used to do this typeahead checking. The <STRONG>ty-</STRONG>
+ <STRONG>peahead</STRONG> routine specifies that the file descriptor <EM>fd</EM> is
+ to be used to check for typeahead instead. If <EM>fd</EM> is -1,
+ then no typeahead checking is done.
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-RETURN-VALUE">RETURN VALUE</a></H2><PRE>
Index: doc/html/man/curs_kernel.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_kernel.3x.html 2016-10-15 23:12:21.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_kernel.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:27.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: curs_kernel.3x,v 1.21 2016/10/15 16:42:55 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: curs_kernel.3x,v 1.22 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-reset_prog_mode_-reset_shell_mode">reset_prog_mode, reset_shell_mode</a></H3><PRE>
The <STRONG>reset_prog_mode</STRONG> and <STRONG>reset_shell_mode</STRONG> routines restore
the terminal to "program" (in <STRONG>curses</STRONG>) or "shell" (out of
- <STRONG>curses</STRONG>) state. These are done automatically by <STRONG>endwin</STRONG>
+ <STRONG>curses</STRONG>) state. These are done automatically by <STRONG><A HREF="curs_initscr.3x.html">endwin(3x)</A></STRONG>
and, after an <STRONG>endwin</STRONG>, by <STRONG>doupdate</STRONG>, so they normally are
not called.
Index: doc/html/man/curs_memleaks.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_memleaks.3x.html 2016-01-30 19:24:53.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_memleaks.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:05:40.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 2008,2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 2008-2010,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: curs_memleaks.3x,v 1.3 2010/12/04 18:40:45 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: curs_memleaks.3x,v 1.4 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -67,17 +67,18 @@
Any implementation of curses must not free the memory as-
sociated with a screen, since (even after calling <STRONG>endwin</STRONG>),
- it must be available for use in the next call to <STRONG>refresh</STRONG>.
- There are also chunks of memory held for performance rea-
- sons. That makes it hard to analyze curses applications
- for memory leaks. To work around this, one can build a
- debugging version of the ncurses library which frees those
- chunks which it can, and provides these functions to free
- all of the memory allocated by the ncurses library.
-
- The _nc_free_and_exit function is the preferred one since
- some of the memory which is freed may be required for the
- application to continue running. Its parameter is the
+ it must be available for use in the next call to <STRONG>re-</STRONG>
+ <STRONG><A HREF="refresh.3x.html">fresh(3x)</A></STRONG>. There are also chunks of memory held for per-
+ formance reasons. That makes it hard to analyze curses
+ applications for memory leaks. To work around this, one
+ can build a debugging version of the ncurses library which
+ frees those chunks which it can, and provides these func-
+ tions to free all of the memory allocated by the ncurses
+ library.
+
+ The _nc_free_and_exit function is the preferred one since
+ some of the memory which is freed may be required for the
+ application to continue running. Its parameter is the
code to pass to the exit routine.
Index: doc/html/man/curs_mouse.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_mouse.3x.html 2016-01-30 19:24:53.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_mouse.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:27.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
<!--
* t
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2014,2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: curs_mouse.3x,v 1.42 2015/07/21 09:27:39 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: curs_mouse.3x,v 1.43 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-DESCRIPTION">DESCRIPTION</a></H2><PRE>
These functions provide an interface to mouse events from
<STRONG><A HREF="ncurses.3x.html">ncurses(3x)</A></STRONG>. Mouse events are represented by <STRONG>KEY_MOUSE</STRONG>
- pseudo-key values in the <STRONG>wgetch</STRONG> input stream.
+ pseudo-key values in the <STRONG><A HREF="curs_getch.3x.html">wgetch(3x)</A></STRONG> input stream.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-mousemask">mousemask</a></H3><PRE>
@@ -178,8 +178,8 @@
stdscr-relative coordinates are not always identical to
window-relative coordinates due to the mechanism to re-
serve lines on top or bottom of the screen for other pur-
- poses (see the <STRONG>ripoffline</STRONG> and <STRONG>slk_init</STRONG> calls, for exam-
- ple).
+ poses (see the <STRONG>ripoffline</STRONG> and <STRONG><A HREF="curs_slk.3x.html">slk_init(3x)</A></STRONG> calls, for ex-
+ ample).
<STRONG>o</STRONG> If the parameter <STRONG>to_screen</STRONG> is <STRONG>TRUE</STRONG>, the pointers <STRONG>pY,</STRONG>
<STRONG>pX</STRONG> must reference the coordinates of a location inside
Index: doc/html/man/curs_move.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_move.3x.html 2016-01-30 19:24:53.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_move.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:27.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2006,2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2010,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: curs_move.3x,v 1.14 2010/12/04 18:40:45 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: curs_move.3x,v 1.15 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -59,9 +59,9 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-DESCRIPTION">DESCRIPTION</a></H2><PRE>
These routines move the cursor associated with the window
to line <EM>y</EM> and column <EM>x</EM>. This routine does not move the
- physical cursor of the terminal until <STRONG>refresh</STRONG> is called.
- The position specified is relative to the upper left-hand
- corner of the window, which is (0,0).
+ physical cursor of the terminal until <STRONG><A HREF="curs_refresh.3x.html">refresh(3x)</A></STRONG> is
+ called. The position specified is relative to the upper
+ left-hand corner of the window, which is (0,0).
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-RETURN-VALUE">RETURN VALUE</a></H2><PRE>
Index: doc/html/man/curs_outopts.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_outopts.3x.html 2016-10-15 23:12:21.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_outopts.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:27.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: curs_outopts.3x,v 1.27 2016/10/15 17:02:31 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: curs_outopts.3x,v 1.28 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@
These routines set options that change the style of output
within <STRONG>curses</STRONG>. All options are initially <STRONG>FALSE</STRONG>, unless
otherwise stated. It is not necessary to turn these op-
- tions off before calling <STRONG>endwin</STRONG>.
+ tions off before calling <STRONG><A HREF="curs_initscr.3x.html">endwin(3x)</A></STRONG>.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-clearok">clearok</a></H3><PRE>
Index: doc/html/man/curs_pad.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_pad.3x.html 2016-01-30 19:24:53.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_pad.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:27.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2010,2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: curs_pad.3x,v 1.18 2015/07/21 08:58:44 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: curs_pad.3x,v 1.19 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -114,9 +114,9 @@
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-pechochar">pechochar</a></H3><PRE>
The <STRONG>pechochar</STRONG> routine is functionally equivalent to a call
- to <STRONG>addch</STRONG> followed by a call to <STRONG>refresh</STRONG>, a call to <STRONG>waddch</STRONG>
- followed by a call to <STRONG>wrefresh</STRONG>, or a call to <STRONG>waddch</STRONG> fol-
- lowed by a call to <STRONG>prefresh</STRONG>. The knowledge that only a
+ to <STRONG>addch</STRONG> followed by a call to <STRONG><A HREF="curs_refresh.3x.html">refresh(3x)</A></STRONG>, a call to <STRONG>wad-</STRONG>
+ <STRONG>dch</STRONG> followed by a call to <STRONG>wrefresh</STRONG>, or a call to <STRONG>waddch</STRONG>
+ followed by a call to <STRONG>prefresh</STRONG>. The knowledge that only a
single character is being output is taken into considera-
tion and, for non-control characters, a considerable per-
formance gain might be seen by using these routines in-
Index: doc/html/man/curs_print.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_print.3x.html 2016-01-30 19:24:53.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_print.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:05:40.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2006,2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2010,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: curs_print.3x,v 1.10 2010/12/04 18:40:45 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: curs_print.3x,v 1.11 2017/01/07 17:33:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
Index: doc/html/man/curs_printw.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_printw.3x.html 2016-01-30 19:24:53.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_printw.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:05:40.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2006,2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2010,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: curs_printw.3x,v 1.20 2010/12/04 18:40:45 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: curs_printw.3x,v 1.21 2017/01/07 17:33:45 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-SEE-ALSO">SEE ALSO</a></H2><PRE>
- <STRONG><A HREF="ncurses.3x.html">curses(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG>printf(3)</STRONG>, <STRONG>vprintf(3)</STRONG>
+ <STRONG><A HREF="ncurses.3x.html">curses(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG>printf(3)</STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="vprintf.3.html">vprintf(3)</A></STRONG>.
Index: doc/html/man/curs_scr_dump.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_scr_dump.3x.html 2016-01-30 19:24:53.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_scr_dump.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:27.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2006,2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2010,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: curs_scr_dump.3x,v 1.9 2010/12/04 18:40:45 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: curs_scr_dump.3x,v 1.10 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -75,10 +75,10 @@
of the screen on this information rather than clearing the
screen and starting from scratch. <STRONG>scr_init</STRONG> is used after
<STRONG>initscr</STRONG> or a <STRONG>system</STRONG> call to share the screen with another
- process which has done a <STRONG>scr_dump</STRONG> after its <STRONG>endwin</STRONG> call.
- The data is declared invalid if the terminfo capabilities
- <STRONG>rmcup</STRONG> and <STRONG>nrrmc</STRONG> exist; also if the terminal has been writ-
- ten to since the preceding <STRONG>scr_dump</STRONG> call.
+ process which has done a <STRONG>scr_dump</STRONG> after its <STRONG><A HREF="curs_initscr.3x.html">endwin(3x)</A></STRONG>
+ call. The data is declared invalid if the terminfo capa-
+ bilities <STRONG>rmcup</STRONG> and <STRONG>nrrmc</STRONG> exist; also if the terminal has
+ been written to since the preceding <STRONG>scr_dump</STRONG> call.
The <STRONG>scr_set</STRONG> routine is a combination of <STRONG>scr_restore</STRONG> and
<STRONG>scr_init</STRONG>. It tells the program that the information in
Index: doc/html/man/curs_sp_funcs.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_sp_funcs.3x.html 2016-01-30 19:24:54.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_sp_funcs.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:27.000000000 +0000
@@ -218,7 +218,7 @@
new_prescr
when creating a new screen, the library uses static
variables which have been preset, e.g., by
- <STRONG><A HREF="curs_util.3x.html">curs_util(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="curs_util.3x.html">curs_util(3x)</A></STRONG>, etc. With the screen-point-
+ <STRONG><A HREF="curs_util.3x.html">use_env(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="curs_util.3x.html">filter(3x)</A></STRONG>, etc. With the screen-point-
er extension, there are situations where it must cre-
ate a current screen before the unextended library
does. The <STRONG>new_prescr</STRONG> function is used internally to
@@ -253,7 +253,7 @@
NCURSES_OUTC
This is a function-pointer type used for the cases
where a function passes characters to the output
- stream, e.g., <STRONG><A HREF="curs_terminfo.3x.html">curs_terminfo(3x)</A></STRONG>.
+ stream, e.g., <STRONG><A HREF="curs_terminfo.3x.html">vidputs(3x)</A></STRONG>.
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-PORTABILITY">PORTABILITY</a></H2><PRE>
Index: doc/html/man/curs_termcap.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_termcap.3x.html 2016-03-27 00:09:25.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_termcap.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:27.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: curs_termcap.3x,v 1.32 2016/03/19 22:52:25 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: curs_termcap.3x,v 1.33 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -155,8 +155,8 @@
case, the first parameter is merely a placeholder.
<STRONG>o</STRONG> Normally the ncurses library is compiled with terminfo
- support. In that case, <STRONG>tgoto</STRONG> uses <STRONG>tparm</STRONG> (a more capa-
- ble formatter).
+ support. In that case, <STRONG>tgoto</STRONG> uses <STRONG><A HREF="curs_terminfo.3x.html">tparm(3x)</A></STRONG> (a more
+ capable formatter).
The <STRONG>tputs</STRONG> routine is described on the <STRONG><A HREF="curs_terminfo.3x.html">curs_terminfo(3x)</A></STRONG>
manual page. It can retrieve capabilities by either term-
Index: doc/html/man/curs_trace.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_trace.3x.html 2016-12-04 01:10:37.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_trace.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:27.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 2000-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 2000-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: curs_trace.3x,v 1.16 2016/12/03 23:53:23 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: curs_trace.3x,v 1.17 2017/01/07 18:45:42 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@
trace user and system times of updates.
<STRONG>TRACE_TPUTS</STRONG>
- trace <STRONG>tputs</STRONG> calls.
+ trace <STRONG><A HREF="curs_terminfo.3x.html">tputs(3x)</A></STRONG> calls.
<STRONG>TRACE_UPDATE</STRONG>
trace update actions, old &amp; new screens.
Index: doc/html/man/curs_util.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_util.3x.html 2016-01-30 19:24:54.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_util.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:27.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
<!--
* t
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2013,2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: curs_util.3x,v 1.43 2015/06/06 23:36:27 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: curs_util.3x,v 1.46 2017/01/07 19:35:54 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -92,11 +92,11 @@
<STRONG>o</STRONG> DEL (character 127) is displayed as <STRONG>^?</STRONG>.
<STRONG>o</STRONG> Values above 128 are either meta characters (if the
- screen has not been initialized, or if <STRONG>meta</STRONG> has been
- called with a <STRONG>TRUE</STRONG> parameter), shown in the <STRONG>M-</STRONG><EM>X</EM> nota-
- tion, or are displayed as themselves. In the latter
- case, the values may not be printable; this follows
- the X/Open specification.
+ screen has not been initialized, or if <STRONG><A HREF="curs_inopts.3x.html">meta(3x)</A></STRONG> has
+ been called with a <STRONG>TRUE</STRONG> parameter), shown in the <STRONG>M-</STRONG><EM>X</EM>
+ notation, or are displayed as themselves. In the lat-
+ ter case, the values may not be printable; this fol-
+ lows the X/Open specification.
<STRONG>o</STRONG> Values above 256 may be the names of the names of
function keys.
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@
screen size). It modifies the way <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> treats environ-
ment variables when determining the screen size.
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> Normally ncurses looks first at the terminal database
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> Normally <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> looks first at the terminal database
for the screen size.
If <STRONG>use_env</STRONG> was called with <STRONG>FALSE</STRONG> for parameter, it
@@ -145,12 +145,12 @@
the terminal database.
<STRONG>o</STRONG> Finally (unless <STRONG>use_env</STRONG> was called with <STRONG>FALSE</STRONG> parame-
- ter), ncurses examines the <STRONG>LINES</STRONG> or <STRONG>COLUMNS</STRONG> environ-
+ ter), <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> examines the <STRONG>LINES</STRONG> or <STRONG>COLUMNS</STRONG> environ-
ment variables, using a value in those to override the
results from the operating system or terminal data-
base.
- Ncurses also updates the screen size in response to
+ <STRONG>Ncurses</STRONG> also updates the screen size in response to
SIGWINCH, unless overridden by the <STRONG>LINES</STRONG> or <STRONG>COLUMNS</STRONG>
environment variables,
@@ -159,17 +159,17 @@
The <STRONG>use_tioctl</STRONG> routine, if used, should be called before
<STRONG>initscr</STRONG> or <STRONG>newterm</STRONG> are called (because those compute the
screen size). After <STRONG>use_tioctl</STRONG> is called with <STRONG>TRUE</STRONG> as an
- argument, ncurses modifies the last step in its computa-
+ argument, <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> modifies the last step in its computa-
tion of screen size as follows:
<STRONG>o</STRONG> checks if the <STRONG>LINES</STRONG> and <STRONG>COLUMNS</STRONG> environment variables
are set to a number greater than zero.
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> for each, ncurses updates the corresponding environ-
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> for each, <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> updates the corresponding environ-
ment variable with the value that it has obtained via
operating system call or from the terminal database.
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> ncurses re-fetches the value of the environment vari-
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> re-fetches the value of the environment vari-
ables so that it is still the environment variables
which set the screen size.
@@ -181,16 +181,16 @@
- TRUE FALSE This is the default behavior. ncurses
+ TRUE FALSE This is the default behavior. <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG>
uses operating system calls unless over-
ridden by $LINES or $COLUMNS environment
variables.
- TRUE TRUE ncurses updates $LINES and $COLUMNS
+ TRUE TRUE <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> updates $LINES and $COLUMNS
based on operating system calls.
- FALSE TRUE ncurses ignores $LINES and $COLUMNS, us-
+ FALSE TRUE <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> ignores $LINES and $COLUMNS, us-
es operating system calls to obtain
size.
- FALSE FALSE ncurses relies on the terminal database
+ FALSE FALSE <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> relies on the terminal database
to determine size.
@@ -249,11 +249,8 @@
returns an error if the terminal was not initial-
ized.
- <STRONG>meta</STRONG> returns an error if the terminal was not initial-
- ized.
-
<STRONG>putwin</STRONG>
- returns an error if the associated <STRONG>fwrite</STRONG> calls
+ returns an error if the associated <STRONG>fwrite</STRONG> calls
return an error.
@@ -261,118 +258,126 @@
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-filter">filter</a></H3><PRE>
The SVr4 documentation describes the action of <STRONG>filter</STRONG> only
- in the vaguest terms. The description here is adapted
- from the XSI Curses standard (which erroneously fails to
+ in the vaguest terms. The description here is adapted
+ from the XSI Curses standard (which erroneously fails to
describe the disabling of <STRONG>cuu</STRONG>).
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-keyname">keyname</a></H3><PRE>
- The <STRONG>keyname</STRONG> function may return the names of user-defined
- string capabilities which are defined in the terminfo en-
- try via the <STRONG>-x</STRONG> option of <STRONG>tic</STRONG>. This implementation auto-
- matically assigns at run-time keycodes to user-defined
- strings which begin with "k". The keycodes start at
- KEY_MAX, but are not guaranteed to be the same value for
- different runs because user-defined codes are merged from
- all terminal descriptions which have been loaded. The
- <STRONG>use_extended_names</STRONG> function controls whether this data is
- loaded when the terminal description is read by the li-
+ The <STRONG>keyname</STRONG> function may return the names of user-defined
+ string capabilities which are defined in the terminfo en-
+ try via the <STRONG>-x</STRONG> option of <STRONG>tic</STRONG>. This implementation auto-
+ matically assigns at run-time keycodes to user-defined
+ strings which begin with "k". The keycodes start at
+ KEY_MAX, but are not guaranteed to be the same value for
+ different runs because user-defined codes are merged from
+ all terminal descriptions which have been loaded. The
+ <STRONG>use_extended_names</STRONG> function controls whether this data is
+ loaded when the terminal description is read by the li-
brary.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-nofilter_use_tioctl">nofilter/use_tioctl</a></H3><PRE>
- The <STRONG>nofilter</STRONG> and <STRONG>use_tioctl</STRONG> routines are specific to
- ncurses. They were not supported on Version 7, BSD or
+ The <STRONG>nofilter</STRONG> and <STRONG>use_tioctl</STRONG> routines are specific to
+ <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG>. They were not supported on Version 7, BSD or
System V implementations. It is recommended that any code
- depending on ncurses extensions be conditioned using
+ depending on <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> extensions be conditioned using
NCURSES_VERSION.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-putwin_getwin">putwin/getwin</a></H3><PRE>
- The <STRONG>putwin</STRONG> and <STRONG>getwin</STRONG> functions have several issues with
+ The <STRONG>putwin</STRONG> and <STRONG>getwin</STRONG> functions have several issues with
portability:
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> The files written and read by these functions use an
- implementation-specific format. Although the format
- is an obvious target for standardization, it has been
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> The files written and read by these functions use an
+ implementation-specific format. Although the format
+ is an obvious target for standardization, it has been
overlooked.
Interestingly enough, according to the copyright dates
in Solaris source, the functions (along with <STRONG>scr_init</STRONG>,
- etc.) originated with the University of California,
- Berkeley (in 1982) and were later (in 1988) incorpo-
- rated into SVr4. Oddly, there are no such functions
+ etc.) originated with the University of California,
+ Berkeley (in 1982) and were later (in 1988) incorpo-
+ rated into SVr4. Oddly, there are no such functions
in the 4.3BSD curses sources.
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> Most implementations simply dump the binary <STRONG>WINDOW</STRONG>
- structure to the file. These include SVr4 curses,
- NetBSD and PDCurses, as well as older ncurses ver-
- sions. This implementation (as well as the X/Open
- variant of Solaris curses, dated 1995) uses textual
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> Most implementations simply dump the binary <STRONG>WINDOW</STRONG>
+ structure to the file. These include SVr4 curses,
+ NetBSD and PDCurses, as well as older <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> ver-
+ sions. This implementation (as well as the X/Open
+ variant of Solaris curses, dated 1995) uses textual
dumps.
- The implementations which use binary dumps use block-
- I/O (the <STRONG>fwrite</STRONG> and <STRONG>fread</STRONG> functions). Those that use
- textual dumps use buffered-I/O. A few applications
+ The implementations which use binary dumps use block-
+ I/O (the <STRONG>fwrite</STRONG> and <STRONG>fread</STRONG> functions). Those that use
+ textual dumps use buffered-I/O. A few applications
may happen to write extra data in the file using these
- functions. Doing that can run into problems mixing
- block- and buffered-I/O. This implementation reduces
- the problem on writes by flushing the output. Howev-
- er, reading from a file written using mixed schemes
+ functions. Doing that can run into problems mixing
+ block- and buffered-I/O. This implementation reduces
+ the problem on writes by flushing the output. Howev-
+ er, reading from a file written using mixed schemes
may not be successful.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-unctrl_wunctrl">unctrl/wunctrl</a></H3><PRE>
- The XSI Curses standard, Issue 4 describes these func-
- tions. It states that <STRONG>unctrl</STRONG> and <STRONG>wunctrl</STRONG> will return a
- null pointer if unsuccessful, but does not define any er-
+ The XSI Curses standard, Issue 4 describes these func-
+ tions. It states that <STRONG>unctrl</STRONG> and <STRONG>wunctrl</STRONG> will return a
+ null pointer if unsuccessful, but does not define any er-
ror conditions. This implementation checks for three cas-
es:
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> the parameter is a 7-bit US-ASCII code. This is the
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> the parameter is a 7-bit US-ASCII code. This is the
case that X/Open Curses documented.
<STRONG>o</STRONG> the parameter is in the range 128-159, i.e., a C1 con-
- trol code. If <STRONG>use_legacy_coding</STRONG> has been called with
- a <STRONG>2</STRONG> parameter, <STRONG>unctrl</STRONG> returns the parameter, i.e., a
- one-character string with the parameter as the first
- character. Otherwise, it returns "~@", "~A", etc.,
+ trol code. If <STRONG>use_legacy_coding</STRONG> has been called with
+ a <STRONG>2</STRONG> parameter, <STRONG>unctrl</STRONG> returns the parameter, i.e., a
+ one-character string with the parameter as the first
+ character. Otherwise, it returns "~@", "~A", etc.,
analogous to "^@", "^A", C0 controls.
- X/Open Curses does not document whether <STRONG>unctrl</STRONG> can be
- called before initializing curses. This implementa-
- tion permits that, and returns the "~@", etc., values
+ X/Open Curses does not document whether <STRONG>unctrl</STRONG> can be
+ called before initializing curses. This implementa-
+ tion permits that, and returns the "~@", etc., values
in that case.
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> parameter values outside the 0 to 255 range. <STRONG>unctrl</STRONG>
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> parameter values outside the 0 to 255 range. <STRONG>unctrl</STRONG>
returns a null pointer.
- The strings returned by <STRONG>unctrl</STRONG> in this implementation are
- determined at compile time, showing C1 controls from the
- upper-128 codes with a `~' prefix rather than `^'. Other
- implementations have different conventions. For example,
- they may show both sets of control characters with `^',
- and strip the parameter to 7 bits. Or they may ignore C1
- controls and treat all of the upper-128 codes as print-
+ The strings returned by <STRONG>unctrl</STRONG> in this implementation are
+ determined at compile time, showing C1 controls from the
+ upper-128 codes with a `~' prefix rather than `^'. Other
+ implementations have different conventions. For example,
+ they may show both sets of control characters with `^',
+ and strip the parameter to 7 bits. Or they may ignore C1
+ controls and treat all of the upper-128 codes as print-
able. This implementation uses 8 bits but does not modify
the string to reflect locale. The <STRONG>use_legacy_coding</STRONG> func-
tion allows the caller to change the output of <STRONG>unctrl</STRONG>.
- Likewise, the <STRONG>meta</STRONG> function allows the caller to change
- the output of <STRONG>keyname</STRONG>, i.e., it determines whether to use
- the `M-' prefix for "meta" keys (codes in the range 128 to
- 255). Both <STRONG>use_legacy_coding</STRONG> and <STRONG>meta</STRONG> succeed only after
- curses is initialized. X/Open Curses does not document
- the treatment of codes 128 to 159. When treating them as
- "meta" keys (or if <STRONG>keyname</STRONG> is called before initializing
- curses), this implementation returns strings "M-^@",
- "M-^A", etc.
+ Likewise, the <STRONG><A HREF="curs_inopts.3x.html">meta(3x)</A></STRONG> function allows the caller to
+ change the output of <STRONG>keyname</STRONG>, i.e., it determines whether
+ to use the `M-' prefix for "meta" keys (codes in the range
+ 128 to 255). Both <STRONG>use_legacy_coding</STRONG> and <STRONG>meta</STRONG> succeed only
+ after curses is initialized. X/Open Curses does not docu-
+ ment the treatment of codes 128 to 159. When treating
+ them as "meta" keys (or if <STRONG>keyname</STRONG> is called before ini-
+ tializing curses), this implementation returns strings
+ "M-^@", "M-^A", etc.
+
+
+</PRE><H3><a name="h3-use_env_use_tioctl">use_env/use_tioctl</a></H3><PRE>
+ If <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> is configured to provide the sp-functions ex-
+ tension, the state of <STRONG>use_env</STRONG> and <STRONG>use_tioctl</STRONG> may be updat-
+ ed before creating each <EM>screen</EM> rather than once only
+ (<STRONG><A HREF="curs_sp_funcs.3x.html">curs_sp_funcs(3x)</A></STRONG>). This feature of <STRONG>use_env</STRONG> is not pro-
+ vided by other implementation of curses.
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-SEE-ALSO">SEE ALSO</a></H2><PRE>
- <STRONG><A HREF="legacy_coding.3x.html">legacy_coding(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="ncurses.3x.html">curses(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="curs_initscr.3x.html">curs_initscr(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG>curs_ker-</STRONG>
- <STRONG><A HREF="curs_kernel.3x.html">nel(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="curs_scr_dump.3x.html">curs_scr_dump(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="curs_variables.3x.html">curs_variables(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG>lega-</STRONG>
- <STRONG><A HREF="legacy_coding.3x.html">cy_coding(3x)</A></STRONG>.
+ <STRONG><A HREF="legacy_coding.3x.html">legacy_coding(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="ncurses.3x.html">curses(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="curs_initscr.3x.html">curs_initscr(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG>curs_in-</STRONG>
+ <STRONG><A HREF="curs_inopts.3x.html">opts(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="curs_kernel.3x.html">curs_kernel(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="curs_scr_dump.3x.html">curs_scr_dump(3x)</A></STRONG>,
+ <STRONG><A HREF="curs_sp_funcs.3x.html">curs_sp_funcs(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="curs_variables.3x.html">curs_variables(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="legacy_coding.3x.html">legacy_coding(3x)</A></STRONG>.
@@ -402,6 +407,7 @@
<li><a href="#h3-nofilter_use_tioctl">nofilter/use_tioctl</a></li>
<li><a href="#h3-putwin_getwin">putwin/getwin</a></li>
<li><a href="#h3-unctrl_wunctrl">unctrl/wunctrl</a></li>
+<li><a href="#h3-use_env_use_tioctl">use_env/use_tioctl</a></li>
</ul>
</li>
<li><a href="#h2-SEE-ALSO">SEE ALSO</a></li>
Index: doc/html/man/curs_variables.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/curs_variables.3x.html 2016-01-30 19:24:54.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/curs_variables.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:28.000000000 +0000
@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-NOTES">NOTES</a></H2><PRE>
The curses library is initialized using either
- <STRONG><A HREF="curs_initscr.3x.html">curs_initscr(3x)</A></STRONG>, or <STRONG><A HREF="curs_initscr.3x.html">curs_initscr(3x)</A></STRONG>.
+ <STRONG><A HREF="curs_initscr.3x.html">initscr(3x)</A></STRONG>, or <STRONG><A HREF="curs_initscr.3x.html">newterm(3x)</A></STRONG>.
If <STRONG>curses</STRONG> is configured to use separate curses/terminfo
libraries, most of these variables reside in the curses
Index: doc/html/man/form.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/form.3x.html 2016-12-31 21:41:36.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/form.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:05:41.000000000 +0000
@@ -239,7 +239,7 @@
<STRONG><A HREF="ncurses.3x.html">curses(3x)</A></STRONG> and related pages whose names begin "form_" for
detailed descriptions of the entry points.
- This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20161231).
+ This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20170107).
Index: doc/html/man/form_driver.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/form_driver.3x.html 2016-12-04 01:10:37.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/form_driver.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:28.000000000 +0000
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@
<STRONG>o</STRONG> The input is a form navigation request. Navigation
request codes are constants defined in <STRONG>&lt;form.h&gt;</STRONG>, which
are distinct from the key- and character codes
- returned by <STRONG><A HREF="wgetch.3x.html">wgetch(3x)</A></STRONG>.
+ returned by <STRONG><A HREF="curs_getch.3x.html">wgetch(3x)</A></STRONG>.
<STRONG>o</STRONG> The input is a printable character. Printable charac-
ters (which must be positive, less than 256) are
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-form_driver_w">form_driver_w</a></H3><PRE>
This extension simplifies the use of the forms library
using wide characters. The input is either a key code (a
- request) or a wide character returned by <STRONG><A HREF="get_wch.3x.html">get_wch(3x)</A></STRONG>. The
+ request) or a wide character returned by <STRONG><A HREF="curs_get_wch.3x.html">get_wch(3x)</A></STRONG>. The
type must be passed as well, to enable the library to
determine whether the parameter is a wide character or a
request.
@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-SEE-ALSO">SEE ALSO</a></H2><PRE>
<STRONG><A HREF="ncurses.3x.html">curses(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="form.3x.html">form(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="form_field_buffer.3x.html">form_field_buffer(3x)</A></STRONG>,
<STRONG><A HREF="form_field_validation.3x.html">form_field_validation(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="form_fieldtype.3x.html">form_fieldtype(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG>form_vari-</STRONG>
- <STRONG><A HREF="form_variables.3x.html">ables(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="curs_getch.3x.html">curs_getch(3x)</A></STRONG>.
+ <STRONG><A HREF="form_variables.3x.html">ables(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="curs_getch.3x.html">getch(3x)</A></STRONG>.
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-NOTES">NOTES</a></H2><PRE>
Index: doc/html/man/form_post.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/form_post.3x.html 2016-01-30 19:24:56.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/form_post.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:28.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
<!--
* t
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2006,2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2010,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: form_post.3x,v 1.10 2015/12/05 20:41:37 jmc Exp @
+ * @Id: form_post.3x,v 1.11 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-DESCRIPTION">DESCRIPTION</a></H2><PRE>
The function <STRONG>post_form</STRONG> displays a form to its associated
subwindow. To trigger physical display of the subwindow,
- use <STRONG>refresh</STRONG> or some equivalent <STRONG>curses</STRONG> routine (the
+ use <STRONG><A HREF="curs_refresh.3x.html">refresh(3x)</A></STRONG> or some equivalent <STRONG>curses</STRONG> routine (the
implicit <STRONG>doupdate</STRONG> triggered by an <STRONG>curses</STRONG> input request
will do).
Index: doc/html/man/form_variables.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/form_variables.3x.html 2016-01-30 19:24:56.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/form_variables.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:28.000000000 +0000
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-DESCRIPTION">DESCRIPTION</a></H2><PRE>
These are building blocks for the form library, defining
- fields that can be created using <STRONG><A HREF="form_fieldtype.3x.html">form_fieldtype(3x)</A></STRONG>. Each
+ fields that can be created using <STRONG><A HREF="form_fieldtype.3x.html">set_fieldtype(3x)</A></STRONG>. Each
provides functions for field- and character-validation,
according to the given datatype.
Index: doc/html/man/infocmp.1m.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/infocmp.1m.html 2016-12-31 21:41:36.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/infocmp.1m.html 2017-01-07 20:05:42.000000000 +0000
@@ -478,7 +478,7 @@
http://invisible-island.net/ncurses/tctest.html
- This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20161231).
+ This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20170107).
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-AUTHOR">AUTHOR</a></H2><PRE>
Index: doc/html/man/infotocap.1m.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/infotocap.1m.html 2016-12-31 21:41:36.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/infotocap.1m.html 2017-01-07 20:05:42.000000000 +0000
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-SEE-ALSO">SEE ALSO</a></H2><PRE>
<STRONG><A HREF="ncurses.3x.html">curses(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="tic.1m.html">tic(1m)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="infocmp.1m.html">infocmp(1m)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="terminfo.5.html">terminfo(5)</A></STRONG>
- This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20161231).
+ This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20170107).
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-AUTHOR">AUTHOR</a></H2><PRE>
Index: doc/html/man/menu.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/menu.3x.html 2016-12-31 21:41:37.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/menu.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:05:42.000000000 +0000
@@ -217,7 +217,7 @@
<STRONG><A HREF="ncurses.3x.html">curses(3x)</A></STRONG> and related pages whose names begin "menu_" for
detailed descriptions of the entry points.
- This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20161231).
+ This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20170107).
Index: doc/html/man/menu_driver.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/menu_driver.3x.html 2016-01-30 19:24:56.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/menu_driver.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:29.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2008,2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2010,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: menu_driver.3x,v 1.20 2010/12/04 18:38:55 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: menu_driver.3x,v 1.21 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@
<STRONG>o</STRONG> The input is a form navigation request. Navigation
request codes are constants defined in <STRONG>&lt;form.h&gt;</STRONG>, which
are distinct from the key- and character codes
- returned by <STRONG>wgetch</STRONG>.
+ returned by <STRONG><A HREF="curs_getch.3x.html">wgetch(3x)</A></STRONG>.
<STRONG>o</STRONG> The input is a printable character. Printable charac-
ters (which must be positive, less than 256) are
@@ -218,7 +218,7 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-SEE-ALSO">SEE ALSO</a></H2><PRE>
- <STRONG><A HREF="ncurses.3x.html">curses(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="menu.3x.html">menu(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="curs_getch.3x.html">curs_getch(3x)</A></STRONG>.
+ <STRONG><A HREF="ncurses.3x.html">curses(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="menu.3x.html">menu(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="curs_getch.3x.html">getch(3x)</A></STRONG>.
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-NOTES">NOTES</a></H2><PRE>
Index: doc/html/man/menu_post.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/menu_post.3x.html 2016-10-15 23:12:23.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/menu_post.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:29.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
<!--
* t
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: menu_post.3x,v 1.13 2016/10/15 17:02:31 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: menu_post.3x,v 1.14 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-DESCRIPTION">DESCRIPTION</a></H2><PRE>
The function <STRONG>post_menu</STRONG> displays a menu to its associated
subwindow. To trigger physical display of the subwindow,
- use <STRONG>refresh</STRONG> or some equivalent <STRONG>curses</STRONG> routine (the
+ use <STRONG><A HREF="curs_refresh.3x.html">refresh(3x)</A></STRONG> or some equivalent <STRONG>curses</STRONG> routine (the
implicit <STRONG>doupdate</STRONG> triggered by an <STRONG>curses</STRONG> input request
will do). <STRONG>post_menu</STRONG> resets the selection status of all
items.
Index: doc/html/man/ncurses.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/ncurses.3x.html 2016-12-31 21:41:37.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/ncurses.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:29.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
<!--
* t
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2014,2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: ncurses.3x,v 1.124 2015/08/08 14:57:51 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: ncurses.3x,v 1.125 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@
sonable optimization. This implementation is "new curses"
(ncurses) and is the approved replacement for 4.4BSD clas-
sic curses, which has been discontinued. This describes
- <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20161231).
+ <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20170107).
The <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> library emulates the curses library of System
V Release 4 UNIX, and XPG4 (X/Open Portability Guide)
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@
The function <STRONG>initscr</STRONG> or <STRONG>newterm</STRONG> must be called to initial-
ize the library before any of the other routines that deal
- with windows and screens are used. The routine <STRONG>endwin</STRONG>
+ with windows and screens are used. The routine <STRONG><A HREF="curs_initscr.3x.html">endwin(3x)</A></STRONG>
must be called before exiting.
To get character-at-a-time input without echoing (most
@@ -153,12 +153,12 @@
names beginning with <STRONG>w</STRONG>, allowing the user to specify a
window. The routines not beginning with <STRONG>w</STRONG> affect <STRONG>stdscr</STRONG>.
- After using routines to manipulate a window, <STRONG>refresh</STRONG> is
- called, telling <STRONG>curses</STRONG> to make the user's CRT screen look
- like <STRONG>stdscr</STRONG>. The characters in a window are actually of
- type <STRONG>chtype</STRONG>, (character and attribute data) so that other
- information about the character may also be stored with
- each character.
+ After using routines to manipulate a window, <STRONG><A HREF="curs_refresh.3x.html">refresh(3x)</A></STRONG>
+ is called, telling <STRONG>curses</STRONG> to make the user's CRT screen
+ look like <STRONG>stdscr</STRONG>. The characters in a window are actually
+ of type <STRONG>chtype</STRONG>, (character and attribute data) so that
+ other information about the character may also be stored
+ with each character.
Special windows called <EM>pads</EM> may also be manipulated.
These are windows which are not constrained to the size of
Index: doc/html/man/ncurses6-config.1.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/ncurses6-config.1.html 2016-12-31 21:41:37.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/ncurses6-config.1.html 2017-01-07 20:05:43.000000000 +0000
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-SEE-ALSO">SEE ALSO</a></H2><PRE>
<STRONG><A HREF="ncurses.3x.html">curses(3x)</A></STRONG>
- This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20161231).
+ This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20170107).
Index: doc/html/man/panel.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/panel.3x.html 2016-12-31 21:41:37.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/panel.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:05:43.000000000 +0000
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-SEE-ALSO">SEE ALSO</a></H2><PRE>
<STRONG><A HREF="ncurses.3x.html">curses(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="curs_variables.3x.html">curs_variables(3x)</A></STRONG>,
- This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20161231).
+ This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20170107).
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-AUTHOR">AUTHOR</a></H2><PRE>
Index: doc/html/man/resizeterm.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/resizeterm.3x.html 2016-01-30 19:24:58.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/resizeterm.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:30.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2013,2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
* Author: Thomas E. Dickey 1996-on
- * @Id: resizeterm.3x,v 1.21 2015/09/26 19:55:32 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: resizeterm.3x,v 1.22 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@
<STRONG>o</STRONG> on receipt of a SIGWINCH, the handler sets a flag
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> which is tested in <STRONG>wgetch</STRONG> and <STRONG>doupdate</STRONG>,
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> which is tested in <STRONG><A HREF="curs_getch.3x.html">wgetch(3x)</A></STRONG> and <STRONG>doupdate</STRONG>,
<STRONG>o</STRONG> in turn, calling the <STRONG>resizeterm</STRONG> function,
@@ -138,9 +138,9 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-PORTABILITY">PORTABILITY</a></H2><PRE>
It is possible to resize the screen with SVr4 curses, by
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> exiting curses with <STRONG><A HREF="endwin.3x.html">endwin(3x)</A></STRONG> and
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> exiting curses with <STRONG><A HREF="curs_initscr.3x.html">endwin(3x)</A></STRONG> and
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> resuming using <STRONG><A HREF="refresh.3x.html">refresh(3x)</A></STRONG>.
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> resuming using <STRONG><A HREF="curs_refresh.3x.html">refresh(3x)</A></STRONG>.
Doing that clears the screen and is visually distracting.
Index: doc/html/man/tabs.1.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/tabs.1.html 2016-12-31 21:41:37.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/tabs.1.html 2017-01-07 20:05:43.000000000 +0000
@@ -170,7 +170,7 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-SEE-ALSO">SEE ALSO</a></H2><PRE>
<STRONG><A HREF="tset.1.html">tset(1)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="infocmp.1m.html">infocmp(1m)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="ncurses.3x.html">curses(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="terminfo.5.html">terminfo(5)</A></STRONG>.
- This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20161231).
+ This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20170107).
Index: doc/html/man/term.5.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/term.5.html 2016-10-22 20:13:56.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/term.5.html 2017-01-07 20:43:30.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: term.5,v 1.24 2016/10/22 19:55:01 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: term.5,v 1.25 2017/01/07 18:45:42 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -95,9 +95,9 @@
made.
The compiled file is created with the <STRONG>tic</STRONG> program, and
- read by the routine <STRONG>setupterm</STRONG>. The file is divided into
- six parts: the header, terminal names, boolean flags, num-
- bers, strings, and string table.
+ read by the routine <STRONG><A HREF="curs_terminfo.3x.html">setupterm(3x)</A></STRONG>. The file is divided
+ into six parts: the header, terminal names, boolean flags,
+ numbers, strings, and string table.
The header section begins the file. This section contains
six short integers in the format described below. These
Index: doc/html/man/term_variables.3x.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/term_variables.3x.html 2016-01-30 19:24:58.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/term_variables.3x.html 2017-01-07 20:43:30.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 2011-2013,2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 2011-2015,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: term_variables.3x,v 1.7 2015/12/05 18:43:25 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: term_variables.3x,v 1.8 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -105,17 +105,17 @@
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Current-Terminal-Data">Current Terminal Data</a></H3><PRE>
After initializing the curses or terminfo interfaces, the
<STRONG>cur_term</STRONG> contains data describing the current terminal.
- This variable is also set as a side-effect of <STRONG><A HREF="curs_initscr.3x.html">curs_initscr(3x)</A></STRONG>
- and <STRONG><A HREF="curs_initscr.3x.html">curs_initscr(3x)</A></STRONG>.
+ This variable is also set as a side-effect of <STRONG><A HREF="curs_initscr.3x.html">set_term(3x)</A></STRONG>
+ and <STRONG><A HREF="curs_initscr.3x.html">delscreen(3x)</A></STRONG>.
It is possible to save a value of <STRONG>cur_term</STRONG> for subsequent
use as a parameter to <STRONG>set_term</STRONG>, for switching between
screens. Alternatively, one can save the return value
- from <STRONG>newterm</STRONG> or <STRONG>setupterm</STRONG> to reuse in <STRONG>set_term</STRONG>.
+ from <STRONG>newterm</STRONG> or <STRONG><A HREF="curs_terminfo.3x.html">setupterm(3x)</A></STRONG> to reuse in <STRONG>set_term</STRONG>.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Terminfo-Names">Terminfo Names</a></H3><PRE>
- The <STRONG><A HREF="tic.1m.html">tic(1m)</A></STRONG> and <STRONG><A HREF="infocmp.1m.html">infocmp(1m)</A></STRONG> programs use lookup tables for
+ The <STRONG><A HREF="tic.1m.html">tic(1)</A></STRONG> and <STRONG><A HREF="infocmp.1m.html">infocmp(1)</A></STRONG> programs use lookup tables for
the long and short names of terminfo capabilities, as well
as the corresponding names for termcap capabilities.
These are available to other applications, although the
@@ -134,39 +134,40 @@
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Terminal-Type">Terminal Type</a></H3><PRE>
On initialization of the curses or terminfo interfaces,
- <STRONG>setupterm</STRONG> copies the terminal name to the array <STRONG>ttytype</STRONG>.
+ <STRONG><A HREF="curs_terminfo.3x.html">setupterm(3x)</A></STRONG> copies the terminal name to the array <STRONG>tty-</STRONG>
+ <STRONG>type</STRONG>.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Terminfo-Names">Terminfo Names</a></H3><PRE>
In addition to the variables, <STRONG>&lt;term.h&gt;</STRONG> also defines a sym-
- bol for each terminfo capability <EM>long</EM> <EM>name</EM>. These are in
+ bol for each terminfo capability <EM>long</EM> <EM>name</EM>. These are in
terms of the symbol <STRONG>CUR</STRONG>, which is defined
#define CUR cur_term-&gt;type.
These symbols provide a faster method of accessing termin-
- fo capabilities than using <STRONG><A HREF="tigetstr.3x.html">tigetstr(3x)</A></STRONG>, etc.
+ fo capabilities than using <STRONG><A HREF="curs_terminfo.3x.html">tigetstr(3x)</A></STRONG>, etc.
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-NOTES">NOTES</a></H2><PRE>
- The low-level terminfo interface is initialized using
- <STRONG><A HREF="curs_terminfo.3x.html">curs_terminfo(3x)</A></STRONG>. The upper-level curses interface uses the
+ The low-level terminfo interface is initialized using
+ <STRONG><A HREF="curs_terminfo.3x.html">setupterm(3x)</A></STRONG>. The upper-level curses interface uses the
low-level terminfo interface, internally.
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-PORTABILITY">PORTABILITY</a></H2><PRE>
- X/Open Curses does not describe any of these except for
- <STRONG>cur_term</STRONG>. (The inclusion of <STRONG>cur_term</STRONG> appears to be an
+ X/Open Curses does not describe any of these except for
+ <STRONG>cur_term</STRONG>. (The inclusion of <STRONG>cur_term</STRONG> appears to be an
oversight, since other comparable low-level information is
omitted by X/Open).
Other implementations may have comparable variables. Some
- implementations provide the variables in their libraries,
+ implementations provide the variables in their libraries,
but omit them from the header files.
- All implementations which provide terminfo interfaces add
- definitions as described in the <STRONG>Terminfo</STRONG> <STRONG>Names</STRONG> section.
- Most, but not all, base the definition upon the <STRONG>cur_term</STRONG>
+ All implementations which provide terminfo interfaces add
+ definitions as described in the <STRONG>Terminfo</STRONG> <STRONG>Names</STRONG> section.
+ Most, but not all, base the definition upon the <STRONG>cur_term</STRONG>
variable.
Index: doc/html/man/terminfo.5.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/terminfo.5.html 2016-12-31 21:41:38.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/terminfo.5.html 2017-01-07 20:43:30.000000000 +0000
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
****************************************************************************
* @Id: terminfo.head,v 1.22 2016/10/15 17:02:31 tom Exp @
* Head of terminfo man page ends here
- * @Id: terminfo.tail,v 1.75 2016/12/24 22:54:11 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: terminfo.tail,v 1.76 2017/01/07 18:32:49 tom Exp @
* Beginning of terminfo.tail file
* This file is part of ncurses.
* See "terminfo.head" for copyright.
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@
nals by giving a set of capabilities which they have, by
specifying how to perform screen operations, and by speci-
fying padding requirements and initialization sequences.
- This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20161231).
+ This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20170107).
Entries in <EM>terminfo</EM> consist of a sequence of `,' separated
fields (embedded commas may be escaped with a backslash or
@@ -1167,8 +1167,8 @@
A delay in milliseconds may appear anywhere in a string
capability, enclosed in $&lt;..&gt; brackets, as in <STRONG>el</STRONG>=\EK$&lt;5&gt;,
- and padding characters are supplied by <STRONG>tputs</STRONG> to provide
- this delay.
+ and padding characters are supplied by <STRONG><A HREF="curs_terminfo.3x.html">tputs(3x)</A></STRONG> to pro-
+ vide this delay.
<STRONG>o</STRONG> The delay must be a number with at most one decimal
place of precision; it may be followed by suffixes "*"
@@ -1379,9 +1379,10 @@
The terms "static" and "dynamic" are misleading.
Historically, these are simply two different sets of
variables, whose values are not reset between calls
- to <STRONG>tparm</STRONG>. However, that fact is not documented in
- other implementations. Relying on it will adversely
- impact portability to other implementations.
+ to <STRONG><A HREF="curs_terminfo.3x.html">tparm(3x)</A></STRONG>. However, that fact is not documented
+ in other implementations. Relying on it will
+ adversely impact portability to other implementa-
+ tions.
<STRONG>%'</STRONG><EM>c</EM><STRONG>'</STRONG> char constant <EM>c</EM>
@@ -1404,16 +1405,16 @@
logical AND and OR operations (for conditionals)
<STRONG>%!</STRONG>, <STRONG>%~</STRONG>
- unary operations (logical and bit complement):
+ unary operations (logical and bit complement):
<EM>push(op</EM> <EM>pop())</EM>
<STRONG>%i</STRONG> add 1 to first two parameters (for ANSI terminals)
<STRONG>%?</STRONG> <EM>expr</EM> <STRONG>%t</STRONG> <EM>thenpart</EM> <STRONG>%e</STRONG> <EM>elsepart</EM> <STRONG>%;</STRONG>
- This forms an if-then-else. The <STRONG>%e</STRONG> <EM>elsepart</EM> is
- optional. Usually the <STRONG>%?</STRONG> <EM>expr</EM> part pushes a value
- onto the stack, and <STRONG>%t</STRONG> pops it from the stack, test-
- ing if it is nonzero (true). If it is zero (false),
+ This forms an if-then-else. The <STRONG>%e</STRONG> <EM>elsepart</EM> is
+ optional. Usually the <STRONG>%?</STRONG> <EM>expr</EM> part pushes a value
+ onto the stack, and <STRONG>%t</STRONG> pops it from the stack, test-
+ ing if it is nonzero (true). If it is zero (false),
control passes to the <STRONG>%e</STRONG> (else) part.
It is possible to form else-if's a la Algol 68:
@@ -1422,221 +1423,221 @@
where ci are conditions, bi are bodies.
Use the <STRONG>-f</STRONG> option of <STRONG>tic</STRONG> or <STRONG>infocmp</STRONG> to see the struc-
- ture of if-then-else's. Some strings, e.g., <STRONG>sgr</STRONG> can
+ ture of if-then-else's. Some strings, e.g., <STRONG>sgr</STRONG> can
be very complicated when written on one line. The <STRONG>-f</STRONG>
- option splits the string into lines with the parts
+ option splits the string into lines with the parts
indented.
Binary operations are in postfix form with the operands in
- the usual order. That is, to get x-5 one would use
- "%gx%{5}%-". <STRONG>%P</STRONG> and <STRONG>%g</STRONG> variables are persistent across
+ the usual order. That is, to get x-5 one would use
+ "%gx%{5}%-". <STRONG>%P</STRONG> and <STRONG>%g</STRONG> variables are persistent across
escape-string evaluations.
Consider the HP2645, which, to get to row 3 and column 12,
- needs to be sent \E&amp;a12c03Y padded for 6 milliseconds.
- Note that the order of the rows and columns is inverted
- here, and that the row and column are printed as two dig-
+ needs to be sent \E&amp;a12c03Y padded for 6 milliseconds.
+ Note that the order of the rows and columns is inverted
+ here, and that the row and column are printed as two dig-
its. Thus its <STRONG>cup</STRONG> capability is "cup=6\E&amp;%p2%2dc%p1%2dY".
The Microterm ACT-IV needs the current row and column sent
- preceded by a <STRONG>^T</STRONG>, with the row and column simply encoded
- in binary, "cup=^T%p1%c%p2%c". Terminals which use "%c"
- need to be able to backspace the cursor (<STRONG>cub1</STRONG>), and to
+ preceded by a <STRONG>^T</STRONG>, with the row and column simply encoded
+ in binary, "cup=^T%p1%c%p2%c". Terminals which use "%c"
+ need to be able to backspace the cursor (<STRONG>cub1</STRONG>), and to
move the cursor up one line on the screen (<STRONG>cuu1</STRONG>). This is
- necessary because it is not always safe to transmit <STRONG>\n</STRONG> <STRONG>^D</STRONG>
- and <STRONG>\r</STRONG>, as the system may change or discard them. (The
- library routines dealing with terminfo set tty modes so
+ necessary because it is not always safe to transmit <STRONG>\n</STRONG> <STRONG>^D</STRONG>
+ and <STRONG>\r</STRONG>, as the system may change or discard them. (The
+ library routines dealing with terminfo set tty modes so
that tabs are never expanded, so \t is safe to send. This
turns out to be essential for the Ann Arbor 4080.)
A final example is the LSI ADM-3a, which uses row and col-
umn offset by a blank character, thus "cup=\E=%p1%'
- '%+%c%p2%' '%+%c". After sending "\E=", this pushes the
- first parameter, pushes the ASCII value for a space (32),
- adds them (pushing the sum on the stack in place of the
- two previous values) and outputs that value as a charac-
- ter. Then the same is done for the second parameter.
+ '%+%c%p2%' '%+%c". After sending "\E=", this pushes the
+ first parameter, pushes the ASCII value for a space (32),
+ adds them (pushing the sum on the stack in place of the
+ two previous values) and outputs that value as a charac-
+ ter. Then the same is done for the second parameter.
More complex arithmetic is possible using the stack.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Cursor-Motions">Cursor Motions</a></H3><PRE>
If the terminal has a fast way to home the cursor (to very
- upper left corner of screen) then this can be given as
- <STRONG>home</STRONG>; similarly a fast way of getting to the lower left-
- hand corner can be given as <STRONG>ll</STRONG>; this may involve going up
- with <STRONG>cuu1</STRONG> from the home position, but a program should
- never do this itself (unless <STRONG>ll</STRONG> does) because it can make
- no assumption about the effect of moving up from the home
- position. Note that the home position is the same as
+ upper left corner of screen) then this can be given as
+ <STRONG>home</STRONG>; similarly a fast way of getting to the lower left-
+ hand corner can be given as <STRONG>ll</STRONG>; this may involve going up
+ with <STRONG>cuu1</STRONG> from the home position, but a program should
+ never do this itself (unless <STRONG>ll</STRONG> does) because it can make
+ no assumption about the effect of moving up from the home
+ position. Note that the home position is the same as
addressing to (0,0): to the top left corner of the screen,
- not of memory. (Thus, the \EH sequence on HP terminals
+ not of memory. (Thus, the \EH sequence on HP terminals
cannot be used for <STRONG>home</STRONG>.)
If the terminal has row or column absolute cursor address-
- ing, these can be given as single parameter capabilities
+ ing, these can be given as single parameter capabilities
<STRONG>hpa</STRONG> (horizontal position absolute) and <STRONG>vpa</STRONG> (vertical posi-
tion absolute). Sometimes these are shorter than the more
- general two parameter sequence (as with the hp2645) and
+ general two parameter sequence (as with the hp2645) and
can be used in preference to <STRONG>cup</STRONG>. If there are parameter-
- ized local motions (e.g., move <EM>n</EM> spaces to the right)
+ ized local motions (e.g., move <EM>n</EM> spaces to the right)
these can be given as <STRONG>cud</STRONG>, <STRONG>cub</STRONG>, <STRONG>cuf</STRONG>, and <STRONG>cuu</STRONG> with a single
- parameter indicating how many spaces to move. These are
- primarily useful if the terminal does not have <STRONG>cup</STRONG>, such
+ parameter indicating how many spaces to move. These are
+ primarily useful if the terminal does not have <STRONG>cup</STRONG>, such
as the TEKTRONIX 4025.
If the terminal needs to be in a special mode when running
a program that uses these capabilities, the codes to enter
- and exit this mode can be given as <STRONG>smcup</STRONG> and <STRONG>rmcup</STRONG>. This
- arises, for example, from terminals like the Concept with
- more than one page of memory. If the terminal has only
- memory relative cursor addressing and not screen relative
+ and exit this mode can be given as <STRONG>smcup</STRONG> and <STRONG>rmcup</STRONG>. This
+ arises, for example, from terminals like the Concept with
+ more than one page of memory. If the terminal has only
+ memory relative cursor addressing and not screen relative
cursor addressing, a one screen-sized window must be fixed
- into the terminal for cursor addressing to work properly.
+ into the terminal for cursor addressing to work properly.
This is also used for the TEKTRONIX 4025, where <STRONG>smcup</STRONG> sets
- the command character to be the one used by terminfo. If
- the <STRONG>smcup</STRONG> sequence will not restore the screen after an
+ the command character to be the one used by terminfo. If
+ the <STRONG>smcup</STRONG> sequence will not restore the screen after an
<STRONG>rmcup</STRONG> sequence is output (to the state prior to outputting
<STRONG>rmcup</STRONG>), specify <STRONG>nrrmc</STRONG>.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Area-Clears">Area Clears</a></H3><PRE>
If the terminal can clear from the current position to the
- end of the line, leaving the cursor where it is, this
+ end of the line, leaving the cursor where it is, this
should be given as <STRONG>el</STRONG>. If the terminal can clear from the
- beginning of the line to the current position inclusive,
- leaving the cursor where it is, this should be given as
- <STRONG>el1</STRONG>. If the terminal can clear from the current position
- to the end of the display, then this should be given as
- <STRONG>ed</STRONG>. <STRONG>Ed</STRONG> is only defined from the first column of a line.
- (Thus, it can be simulated by a request to delete a large
+ beginning of the line to the current position inclusive,
+ leaving the cursor where it is, this should be given as
+ <STRONG>el1</STRONG>. If the terminal can clear from the current position
+ to the end of the display, then this should be given as
+ <STRONG>ed</STRONG>. <STRONG>Ed</STRONG> is only defined from the first column of a line.
+ (Thus, it can be simulated by a request to delete a large
number of lines, if a true <STRONG>ed</STRONG> is not available.)
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Insert_delete-line-and-vertical-motions">Insert/delete line and vertical motions</a></H3><PRE>
- If the terminal can open a new blank line before the line
- where the cursor is, this should be given as <STRONG>il1</STRONG>; this is
- done only from the first position of a line. The cursor
+ If the terminal can open a new blank line before the line
+ where the cursor is, this should be given as <STRONG>il1</STRONG>; this is
+ done only from the first position of a line. The cursor
must then appear on the newly blank line. If the terminal
- can delete the line which the cursor is on, then this
- should be given as <STRONG>dl1</STRONG>; this is done only from the first
- position on the line to be deleted. Versions of <STRONG>il1</STRONG> and
- <STRONG>dl1</STRONG> which take a single parameter and insert or delete
+ can delete the line which the cursor is on, then this
+ should be given as <STRONG>dl1</STRONG>; this is done only from the first
+ position on the line to be deleted. Versions of <STRONG>il1</STRONG> and
+ <STRONG>dl1</STRONG> which take a single parameter and insert or delete
that many lines can be given as <STRONG>il</STRONG> and <STRONG>dl</STRONG>.
- If the terminal has a settable scrolling region (like the
- vt100) the command to set this can be described with the
- <STRONG>csr</STRONG> capability, which takes two parameters: the top and
+ If the terminal has a settable scrolling region (like the
+ vt100) the command to set this can be described with the
+ <STRONG>csr</STRONG> capability, which takes two parameters: the top and
bottom lines of the scrolling region. The cursor position
is, alas, undefined after using this command.
- It is possible to get the effect of insert or delete line
+ It is possible to get the effect of insert or delete line
using <STRONG>csr</STRONG> on a properly chosen region; the <STRONG>sc</STRONG> and <STRONG>rc</STRONG> (save
- and restore cursor) commands may be useful for ensuring
- that your synthesized insert/delete string does not move
- the cursor. (Note that the <STRONG><A HREF="ncurses.3x.html">ncurses(3x)</A></STRONG> library does this
- synthesis automatically, so you need not compose
+ and restore cursor) commands may be useful for ensuring
+ that your synthesized insert/delete string does not move
+ the cursor. (Note that the <STRONG><A HREF="ncurses.3x.html">ncurses(3x)</A></STRONG> library does this
+ synthesis automatically, so you need not compose
insert/delete strings for an entry with <STRONG>csr</STRONG>).
Yet another way to construct insert and delete might be to
- use a combination of index with the memory-lock feature
- found on some terminals (like the HP-700/90 series, which
+ use a combination of index with the memory-lock feature
+ found on some terminals (like the HP-700/90 series, which
however also has insert/delete).
- Inserting lines at the top or bottom of the screen can
- also be done using <STRONG>ri</STRONG> or <STRONG>ind</STRONG> on many terminals without a
- true insert/delete line, and is often faster even on ter-
+ Inserting lines at the top or bottom of the screen can
+ also be done using <STRONG>ri</STRONG> or <STRONG>ind</STRONG> on many terminals without a
+ true insert/delete line, and is often faster even on ter-
minals with those features.
- The boolean <STRONG>non_dest_scroll_region</STRONG> should be set if each
- scrolling window is effectively a view port on a screen-
- sized canvas. To test for this capability, create a
- scrolling region in the middle of the screen, write some-
- thing to the bottom line, move the cursor to the top of
+ The boolean <STRONG>non_dest_scroll_region</STRONG> should be set if each
+ scrolling window is effectively a view port on a screen-
+ sized canvas. To test for this capability, create a
+ scrolling region in the middle of the screen, write some-
+ thing to the bottom line, move the cursor to the top of
the region, and do <STRONG>ri</STRONG> followed by <STRONG>dl1</STRONG> or <STRONG>ind</STRONG>. If the data
- scrolled off the bottom of the region by the <STRONG>ri</STRONG> re-
- appears, then scrolling is non-destructive. System V and
- XSI Curses expect that <STRONG>ind</STRONG>, <STRONG>ri</STRONG>, <STRONG>indn</STRONG>, and <STRONG>rin</STRONG> will simu-
- late destructive scrolling; their documentation cautions
- you not to define <STRONG>csr</STRONG> unless this is true. This <STRONG>curses</STRONG>
+ scrolled off the bottom of the region by the <STRONG>ri</STRONG> re-
+ appears, then scrolling is non-destructive. System V and
+ XSI Curses expect that <STRONG>ind</STRONG>, <STRONG>ri</STRONG>, <STRONG>indn</STRONG>, and <STRONG>rin</STRONG> will simu-
+ late destructive scrolling; their documentation cautions
+ you not to define <STRONG>csr</STRONG> unless this is true. This <STRONG>curses</STRONG>
implementation is more liberal and will do explicit erases
after scrolling if <STRONG>ndsrc</STRONG> is defined.
If the terminal has the ability to define a window as part
- of memory, which all commands affect, it should be given
+ of memory, which all commands affect, it should be given
as the parameterized string <STRONG>wind</STRONG>. The four parameters are
- the starting and ending lines in memory and the starting
+ the starting and ending lines in memory and the starting
and ending columns in memory, in that order.
- If the terminal can retain display memory above, then the
- <STRONG>da</STRONG> capability should be given; if display memory can be
- retained below, then <STRONG>db</STRONG> should be given. These indicate
- that deleting a line or scrolling may bring non-blank
- lines up from below or that scrolling back with <STRONG>ri</STRONG> may
+ If the terminal can retain display memory above, then the
+ <STRONG>da</STRONG> capability should be given; if display memory can be
+ retained below, then <STRONG>db</STRONG> should be given. These indicate
+ that deleting a line or scrolling may bring non-blank
+ lines up from below or that scrolling back with <STRONG>ri</STRONG> may
bring down non-blank lines.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Insert_Delete-Character">Insert/Delete Character</a></H3><PRE>
- There are two basic kinds of intelligent terminals with
- respect to insert/delete character which can be described
- using <EM>terminfo.</EM> The most common insert/delete character
- operations affect only the characters on the current line
- and shift characters off the end of the line rigidly.
- Other terminals, such as the Concept 100 and the Perkin
- Elmer Owl, make a distinction between typed and untyped
- blanks on the screen, shifting upon an insert or delete
- only to an untyped blank on the screen which is either
+ There are two basic kinds of intelligent terminals with
+ respect to insert/delete character which can be described
+ using <EM>terminfo.</EM> The most common insert/delete character
+ operations affect only the characters on the current line
+ and shift characters off the end of the line rigidly.
+ Other terminals, such as the Concept 100 and the Perkin
+ Elmer Owl, make a distinction between typed and untyped
+ blanks on the screen, shifting upon an insert or delete
+ only to an untyped blank on the screen which is either
eliminated, or expanded to two untyped blanks.
- You can determine the kind of terminal you have by clear-
- ing the screen and then typing text separated by cursor
- motions. Type "abc def" using local cursor motions
- (not spaces) between the "abc" and the "def". Then posi-
- tion the cursor before the "abc" and put the terminal in
- insert mode. If typing characters causes the rest of the
- line to shift rigidly and characters to fall off the end,
+ You can determine the kind of terminal you have by clear-
+ ing the screen and then typing text separated by cursor
+ motions. Type "abc def" using local cursor motions
+ (not spaces) between the "abc" and the "def". Then posi-
+ tion the cursor before the "abc" and put the terminal in
+ insert mode. If typing characters causes the rest of the
+ line to shift rigidly and characters to fall off the end,
then your terminal does not distinguish between blanks and
- untyped positions. If the "abc" shifts over to the "def"
- which then move together around the end of the current
- line and onto the next as you insert, you have the second
+ untyped positions. If the "abc" shifts over to the "def"
+ which then move together around the end of the current
+ line and onto the next as you insert, you have the second
type of terminal, and should give the capability <STRONG>in</STRONG>, which
stands for "insert null".
- While these are two logically separate attributes (one
- line versus multi-line insert mode, and special treatment
- of untyped spaces) we have seen no terminals whose insert
+ While these are two logically separate attributes (one
+ line versus multi-line insert mode, and special treatment
+ of untyped spaces) we have seen no terminals whose insert
mode cannot be described with the single attribute.
- Terminfo can describe both terminals which have an insert
+ Terminfo can describe both terminals which have an insert
mode, and terminals which send a simple sequence to open a
- blank position on the current line. Give as <STRONG>smir</STRONG> the
- sequence to get into insert mode. Give as <STRONG>rmir</STRONG> the
- sequence to leave insert mode. Now give as <STRONG>ich1</STRONG> any
+ blank position on the current line. Give as <STRONG>smir</STRONG> the
+ sequence to get into insert mode. Give as <STRONG>rmir</STRONG> the
+ sequence to leave insert mode. Now give as <STRONG>ich1</STRONG> any
sequence needed to be sent just before sending the charac-
- ter to be inserted. Most terminals with a true insert
- mode will not give <STRONG>ich1</STRONG>; terminals which send a sequence
+ ter to be inserted. Most terminals with a true insert
+ mode will not give <STRONG>ich1</STRONG>; terminals which send a sequence
to open a screen position should give it here.
- If your terminal has both, insert mode is usually prefer-
- able to <STRONG>ich1</STRONG>. Technically, you should not give both
- unless the terminal actually requires both to be used in
- combination. Accordingly, some non-curses applications
- get confused if both are present; the symptom is doubled
+ If your terminal has both, insert mode is usually prefer-
+ able to <STRONG>ich1</STRONG>. Technically, you should not give both
+ unless the terminal actually requires both to be used in
+ combination. Accordingly, some non-curses applications
+ get confused if both are present; the symptom is doubled
characters in an update using insert. This requirement is
now rare; most <STRONG>ich</STRONG> sequences do not require previous smir,
and most smir insert modes do not require <STRONG>ich1</STRONG> before each
- character. Therefore, the new <STRONG>curses</STRONG> actually assumes
- this is the case and uses either <STRONG>rmir</STRONG>/<STRONG>smir</STRONG> or <STRONG>ich</STRONG>/<STRONG>ich1</STRONG> as
+ character. Therefore, the new <STRONG>curses</STRONG> actually assumes
+ this is the case and uses either <STRONG>rmir</STRONG>/<STRONG>smir</STRONG> or <STRONG>ich</STRONG>/<STRONG>ich1</STRONG> as
appropriate (but not both). If you have to write an entry
- to be used under new curses for a terminal old enough to
+ to be used under new curses for a terminal old enough to
need both, include the <STRONG>rmir</STRONG>/<STRONG>smir</STRONG> sequences in <STRONG>ich1</STRONG>.
If post insert padding is needed, give this as a number of
- milliseconds in <STRONG>ip</STRONG> (a string option). Any other sequence
- which may need to be sent after an insert of a single
+ milliseconds in <STRONG>ip</STRONG> (a string option). Any other sequence
+ which may need to be sent after an insert of a single
character may also be given in <STRONG>ip</STRONG>. If your terminal needs
both to be placed into an "insert mode" and a special code
- to precede each inserted character, then both <STRONG>smir</STRONG>/<STRONG>rmir</STRONG>
- and <STRONG>ich1</STRONG> can be given, and both will be used. The <STRONG>ich</STRONG>
+ to precede each inserted character, then both <STRONG>smir</STRONG>/<STRONG>rmir</STRONG>
+ and <STRONG>ich1</STRONG> can be given, and both will be used. The <STRONG>ich</STRONG>
capability, with one parameter, <EM>n</EM>, will repeat the effects
of <STRONG>ich1</STRONG> <EM>n</EM> times.
@@ -1644,62 +1645,62 @@
in insert mode, give this as a number of milliseconds pad-
ding in <STRONG>rmp</STRONG>.
- It is occasionally necessary to move around while in
- insert mode to delete characters on the same line (e.g.,
- if there is a tab after the insertion position). If your
- terminal allows motion while in insert mode you can give
- the capability <STRONG>mir</STRONG> to speed up inserting in this case.
- Omitting <STRONG>mir</STRONG> will affect only speed. Some terminals
+ It is occasionally necessary to move around while in
+ insert mode to delete characters on the same line (e.g.,
+ if there is a tab after the insertion position). If your
+ terminal allows motion while in insert mode you can give
+ the capability <STRONG>mir</STRONG> to speed up inserting in this case.
+ Omitting <STRONG>mir</STRONG> will affect only speed. Some terminals
(notably Datamedia's) must not have <STRONG>mir</STRONG> because of the way
their insert mode works.
- Finally, you can specify <STRONG>dch1</STRONG> to delete a single charac-
- ter, <STRONG>dch</STRONG> with one parameter, <EM>n</EM>, to delete <EM>n</EM> <EM>characters,</EM>
- and delete mode by giving <STRONG>smdc</STRONG> and <STRONG>rmdc</STRONG> to enter and exit
- delete mode (any mode the terminal needs to be placed in
+ Finally, you can specify <STRONG>dch1</STRONG> to delete a single charac-
+ ter, <STRONG>dch</STRONG> with one parameter, <EM>n</EM>, to delete <EM>n</EM> <EM>characters,</EM>
+ and delete mode by giving <STRONG>smdc</STRONG> and <STRONG>rmdc</STRONG> to enter and exit
+ delete mode (any mode the terminal needs to be placed in
for <STRONG>dch1</STRONG> to work).
- A command to erase <EM>n</EM> characters (equivalent to outputting
- <EM>n</EM> blanks without moving the cursor) can be given as <STRONG>ech</STRONG>
+ A command to erase <EM>n</EM> characters (equivalent to outputting
+ <EM>n</EM> blanks without moving the cursor) can be given as <STRONG>ech</STRONG>
with one parameter.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Highlighting_-Underlining_-and-Visible-Bells">Highlighting, Underlining, and Visible Bells</a></H3><PRE>
If your terminal has one or more kinds of display
- attributes, these can be represented in a number of dif-
+ attributes, these can be represented in a number of dif-
ferent ways. You should choose one display form as <EM>stand-</EM>
<EM>out</EM> <EM>mode</EM>, representing a good, high contrast, easy-on-the-
- eyes, format for highlighting error messages and other
- attention getters. (If you have a choice, reverse video
- plus half-bright is good, or reverse video alone.) The
- sequences to enter and exit standout mode are given as
- <STRONG>smso</STRONG> and <STRONG>rmso</STRONG>, respectively. If the code to change into
- or out of standout mode leaves one or even two blank spa-
- ces on the screen, as the TVI 912 and Teleray 1061 do,
+ eyes, format for highlighting error messages and other
+ attention getters. (If you have a choice, reverse video
+ plus half-bright is good, or reverse video alone.) The
+ sequences to enter and exit standout mode are given as
+ <STRONG>smso</STRONG> and <STRONG>rmso</STRONG>, respectively. If the code to change into
+ or out of standout mode leaves one or even two blank spa-
+ ces on the screen, as the TVI 912 and Teleray 1061 do,
then <STRONG>xmc</STRONG> should be given to tell how many spaces are left.
- Codes to begin underlining and end underlining can be
- given as <STRONG>smul</STRONG> and <STRONG>rmul</STRONG> respectively. If the terminal has
- a code to underline the current character and move the
+ Codes to begin underlining and end underlining can be
+ given as <STRONG>smul</STRONG> and <STRONG>rmul</STRONG> respectively. If the terminal has
+ a code to underline the current character and move the
cursor one space to the right, such as the Microterm Mime,
this can be given as <STRONG>uc</STRONG>.
- Other capabilities to enter various highlighting modes
- include <STRONG>blink</STRONG> (blinking) <STRONG>bold</STRONG> (bold or extra bright) <STRONG>dim</STRONG>
- (dim or half-bright) <STRONG>invis</STRONG> (blanking or invisible text)
- <STRONG>prot</STRONG> (protected) <STRONG>rev</STRONG> (reverse video) <STRONG>sgr0</STRONG> (turn off <EM>all</EM>
- attribute modes) <STRONG>smacs</STRONG> (enter alternate character set
- mode) and <STRONG>rmacs</STRONG> (exit alternate character set mode).
- Turning on any of these modes singly may or may not turn
+ Other capabilities to enter various highlighting modes
+ include <STRONG>blink</STRONG> (blinking) <STRONG>bold</STRONG> (bold or extra bright) <STRONG>dim</STRONG>
+ (dim or half-bright) <STRONG>invis</STRONG> (blanking or invisible text)
+ <STRONG>prot</STRONG> (protected) <STRONG>rev</STRONG> (reverse video) <STRONG>sgr0</STRONG> (turn off <EM>all</EM>
+ attribute modes) <STRONG>smacs</STRONG> (enter alternate character set
+ mode) and <STRONG>rmacs</STRONG> (exit alternate character set mode).
+ Turning on any of these modes singly may or may not turn
off other modes.
- If there is a sequence to set arbitrary combinations of
- modes, this should be given as <STRONG>sgr</STRONG> (set attributes), tak-
- ing 9 parameters. Each parameter is either 0 or nonzero,
+ If there is a sequence to set arbitrary combinations of
+ modes, this should be given as <STRONG>sgr</STRONG> (set attributes), tak-
+ ing 9 parameters. Each parameter is either 0 or nonzero,
as the corresponding attribute is on or off. The 9 param-
- eters are, in order: standout, underline, reverse, blink,
- dim, bold, blank, protect, alternate character set. Not
- all modes need be supported by <STRONG>sgr</STRONG>, only those for which
+ eters are, in order: standout, underline, reverse, blink,
+ dim, bold, blank, protect, alternate character set. Not
+ all modes need be supported by <STRONG>sgr</STRONG>, only those for which
corresponding separate attribute commands exist.
For example, the DEC vt220 supports most of the modes:
@@ -1717,22 +1718,22 @@
p8 protect not used
p9 altcharset ^O (off) ^N (on)
- We begin each escape sequence by turning off any existing
- modes, since there is no quick way to determine whether
+ We begin each escape sequence by turning off any existing
+ modes, since there is no quick way to determine whether
they are active. Standout is set up to be the combination
- of reverse and bold. The vt220 terminal has a protect
- mode, though it is not commonly used in sgr because it
- protects characters on the screen from the host's era-
- sures. The altcharset mode also is different in that it
- is either ^O or ^N, depending on whether it is off or on.
- If all modes are turned on, the resulting sequence is
+ of reverse and bold. The vt220 terminal has a protect
+ mode, though it is not commonly used in sgr because it
+ protects characters on the screen from the host's era-
+ sures. The altcharset mode also is different in that it
+ is either ^O or ^N, depending on whether it is off or on.
+ If all modes are turned on, the resulting sequence is
\E[0;1;4;5;7;8m^N.
- Some sequences are common to different modes. For exam-
- ple, ;7 is output when either p1 or p3 is true, that is,
+ Some sequences are common to different modes. For exam-
+ ple, ;7 is output when either p1 or p3 is true, that is,
if either standout or reverse modes are turned on.
- Writing out the above sequences, along with their depen-
+ Writing out the above sequences, along with their depen-
dencies yields
<STRONG>sequence</STRONG> <STRONG>when</STRONG> <STRONG>to</STRONG> <STRONG>output</STRONG> <STRONG>terminfo</STRONG> <STRONG>translation</STRONG>
@@ -1751,62 +1752,62 @@
sgr=\E[0%?%p1%p6%|%t;1%;%?%p2%t;4%;%?%p4%t;5%;
%?%p1%p3%|%t;7%;%?%p7%t;8%;m%?%p9%t\016%e\017%;,
- Remember that if you specify sgr, you must also specify
- sgr0. Also, some implementations rely on sgr being given
- if sgr0 is, Not all terminfo entries necessarily have an
- sgr string, however. Many terminfo entries are derived
- from termcap entries which have no sgr string. The only
- drawback to adding an sgr string is that termcap also
- assumes that sgr0 does not exit alternate character set
+ Remember that if you specify sgr, you must also specify
+ sgr0. Also, some implementations rely on sgr being given
+ if sgr0 is, Not all terminfo entries necessarily have an
+ sgr string, however. Many terminfo entries are derived
+ from termcap entries which have no sgr string. The only
+ drawback to adding an sgr string is that termcap also
+ assumes that sgr0 does not exit alternate character set
mode.
- Terminals with the "magic cookie" glitch (<STRONG>xmc</STRONG>) deposit
+ Terminals with the "magic cookie" glitch (<STRONG>xmc</STRONG>) deposit
special "cookies" when they receive mode-setting
- sequences, which affect the display algorithm rather than
- having extra bits for each character. Some terminals,
- such as the HP 2621, automatically leave standout mode
- when they move to a new line or the cursor is addressed.
- Programs using standout mode should exit standout mode
- before moving the cursor or sending a newline, unless the
- <STRONG>msgr</STRONG> capability, asserting that it is safe to move in
+ sequences, which affect the display algorithm rather than
+ having extra bits for each character. Some terminals,
+ such as the HP 2621, automatically leave standout mode
+ when they move to a new line or the cursor is addressed.
+ Programs using standout mode should exit standout mode
+ before moving the cursor or sending a newline, unless the
+ <STRONG>msgr</STRONG> capability, asserting that it is safe to move in
standout mode, is present.
- If the terminal has a way of flashing the screen to indi-
- cate an error quietly (a bell replacement) then this can
+ If the terminal has a way of flashing the screen to indi-
+ cate an error quietly (a bell replacement) then this can
be given as <STRONG>flash</STRONG>; it must not move the cursor.
- If the cursor needs to be made more visible than normal
+ If the cursor needs to be made more visible than normal
when it is not on the bottom line (to make, for example, a
- non-blinking underline into an easier to find block or
+ non-blinking underline into an easier to find block or
blinking underline) give this sequence as <STRONG>cvvis</STRONG>. If there
- is a way to make the cursor completely invisible, give
+ is a way to make the cursor completely invisible, give
that as <STRONG>civis</STRONG>. The capability <STRONG>cnorm</STRONG> should be given which
undoes the effects of both of these modes.
If your terminal correctly generates underlined characters
- (with no special codes needed) even though it does not
- overstrike, then you should give the capability <STRONG>ul</STRONG>. If a
- character overstriking another leaves both characters on
+ (with no special codes needed) even though it does not
+ overstrike, then you should give the capability <STRONG>ul</STRONG>. If a
+ character overstriking another leaves both characters on
the screen, specify the capability <STRONG>os</STRONG>. If overstrikes are
- erasable with a blank, then this should be indicated by
+ erasable with a blank, then this should be indicated by
giving <STRONG>eo</STRONG>.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Keypad-and-Function-Keys">Keypad and Function Keys</a></H3><PRE>
If the terminal has a keypad that transmits codes when the
- keys are pressed, this information can be given. Note
+ keys are pressed, this information can be given. Note
that it is not possible to handle terminals where the key-
pad only works in local (this applies, for example, to the
- unshifted HP 2621 keys). If the keypad can be set to
- transmit or not transmit, give these codes as <STRONG>smkx</STRONG> and
+ unshifted HP 2621 keys). If the keypad can be set to
+ transmit or not transmit, give these codes as <STRONG>smkx</STRONG> and
<STRONG>rmkx</STRONG>. Otherwise the keypad is assumed to always transmit.
- The codes sent by the left arrow, right arrow, up arrow,
- down arrow, and home keys can be given as <STRONG>kcub1,</STRONG> <STRONG>kcuf1,</STRONG>
- <STRONG>kcuu1,</STRONG> <STRONG>kcud1,</STRONG> and <STRONG>khome</STRONG> respectively. If there are func-
- tion keys such as f0, f1, ..., f10, the codes they send
- can be given as <STRONG>kf0,</STRONG> <STRONG>kf1,</STRONG> <STRONG>...,</STRONG> <STRONG>kf10</STRONG>. If these keys have
- labels other than the default f0 through f10, the labels
+ The codes sent by the left arrow, right arrow, up arrow,
+ down arrow, and home keys can be given as <STRONG>kcub1,</STRONG> <STRONG>kcuf1,</STRONG>
+ <STRONG>kcuu1,</STRONG> <STRONG>kcud1,</STRONG> and <STRONG>khome</STRONG> respectively. If there are func-
+ tion keys such as f0, f1, ..., f10, the codes they send
+ can be given as <STRONG>kf0,</STRONG> <STRONG>kf1,</STRONG> <STRONG>...,</STRONG> <STRONG>kf10</STRONG>. If these keys have
+ labels other than the default f0 through f10, the labels
can be given as <STRONG>lf0,</STRONG> <STRONG>lf1,</STRONG> <STRONG>...,</STRONG> <STRONG>lf10</STRONG>.
The codes transmitted by certain other special keys can be
@@ -1846,60 +1847,60 @@
<STRONG>o</STRONG> <STRONG>khts</STRONG> (set a tab stop in this column).
- In addition, if the keypad has a 3 by 3 array of keys
- including the four arrow keys, the other five keys can be
+ In addition, if the keypad has a 3 by 3 array of keys
+ including the four arrow keys, the other five keys can be
given as <STRONG>ka1</STRONG>, <STRONG>ka3</STRONG>, <STRONG>kb2</STRONG>, <STRONG>kc1</STRONG>, and <STRONG>kc3</STRONG>. These keys are use-
- ful when the effects of a 3 by 3 directional pad are
+ ful when the effects of a 3 by 3 directional pad are
needed.
- Strings to program function keys can be given as <STRONG>pfkey</STRONG>,
- <STRONG>pfloc</STRONG>, and <STRONG>pfx</STRONG>. A string to program screen labels should
- be specified as <STRONG>pln</STRONG>. Each of these strings takes two
- parameters: the function key number to program (from 0 to
- 10) and the string to program it with. Function key num-
- bers out of this range may program undefined keys in a
- terminal dependent manner. The difference between the
- capabilities is that <STRONG>pfkey</STRONG> causes pressing the given key
- to be the same as the user typing the given string; <STRONG>pfloc</STRONG>
+ Strings to program function keys can be given as <STRONG>pfkey</STRONG>,
+ <STRONG>pfloc</STRONG>, and <STRONG>pfx</STRONG>. A string to program screen labels should
+ be specified as <STRONG>pln</STRONG>. Each of these strings takes two
+ parameters: the function key number to program (from 0 to
+ 10) and the string to program it with. Function key num-
+ bers out of this range may program undefined keys in a
+ terminal dependent manner. The difference between the
+ capabilities is that <STRONG>pfkey</STRONG> causes pressing the given key
+ to be the same as the user typing the given string; <STRONG>pfloc</STRONG>
causes the string to be executed by the terminal in local;
- and <STRONG>pfx</STRONG> causes the string to be transmitted to the com-
+ and <STRONG>pfx</STRONG> causes the string to be transmitted to the com-
puter.
The capabilities <STRONG>nlab</STRONG>, <STRONG>lw</STRONG> and <STRONG>lh</STRONG> define the number of pro-
- grammable screen labels and their width and height. If
- there are commands to turn the labels on and off, give
- them in <STRONG>smln</STRONG> and <STRONG>rmln</STRONG>. <STRONG>smln</STRONG> is normally output after one
+ grammable screen labels and their width and height. If
+ there are commands to turn the labels on and off, give
+ them in <STRONG>smln</STRONG> and <STRONG>rmln</STRONG>. <STRONG>smln</STRONG> is normally output after one
or more pln sequences to make sure that the change becomes
visible.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Tabs-and-Initialization">Tabs and Initialization</a></H3><PRE>
- If the terminal has hardware tabs, the command to advance
- to the next tab stop can be given as <STRONG>ht</STRONG> (usually control
+ If the terminal has hardware tabs, the command to advance
+ to the next tab stop can be given as <STRONG>ht</STRONG> (usually control
I). A "back-tab" command which moves leftward to the pre-
- ceding tab stop can be given as <STRONG>cbt</STRONG>. By convention, if
- the teletype modes indicate that tabs are being expanded
- by the computer rather than being sent to the terminal,
- programs should not use <STRONG>ht</STRONG> or <STRONG>cbt</STRONG> even if they are
- present, since the user may not have the tab stops prop-
- erly set. If the terminal has hardware tabs which are
- initially set every <EM>n</EM> spaces when the terminal is powered
- up, the numeric parameter <STRONG>it</STRONG> is given, showing the number
- of spaces the tabs are set to. This is normally used by
- the <STRONG>tset</STRONG> command to determine whether to set the mode for
- hardware tab expansion, and whether to set the tab stops.
- If the terminal has tab stops that can be saved in non-
- volatile memory, the terminfo description can assume that
+ ceding tab stop can be given as <STRONG>cbt</STRONG>. By convention, if
+ the teletype modes indicate that tabs are being expanded
+ by the computer rather than being sent to the terminal,
+ programs should not use <STRONG>ht</STRONG> or <STRONG>cbt</STRONG> even if they are
+ present, since the user may not have the tab stops prop-
+ erly set. If the terminal has hardware tabs which are
+ initially set every <EM>n</EM> spaces when the terminal is powered
+ up, the numeric parameter <STRONG>it</STRONG> is given, showing the number
+ of spaces the tabs are set to. This is normally used by
+ the <STRONG>tset</STRONG> command to determine whether to set the mode for
+ hardware tab expansion, and whether to set the tab stops.
+ If the terminal has tab stops that can be saved in non-
+ volatile memory, the terminfo description can assume that
they are properly set.
- Other capabilities include <STRONG>is1</STRONG>, <STRONG>is2</STRONG>, and <STRONG>is3</STRONG>, initializa-
- tion strings for the terminal, <STRONG>iprog</STRONG>, the path name of a
- program to be run to initialize the terminal, and <STRONG>if</STRONG>, the
- name of a file containing long initialization strings.
- These strings are expected to set the terminal into modes
- consistent with the rest of the terminfo description.
+ Other capabilities include <STRONG>is1</STRONG>, <STRONG>is2</STRONG>, and <STRONG>is3</STRONG>, initializa-
+ tion strings for the terminal, <STRONG>iprog</STRONG>, the path name of a
+ program to be run to initialize the terminal, and <STRONG>if</STRONG>, the
+ name of a file containing long initialization strings.
+ These strings are expected to set the terminal into modes
+ consistent with the rest of the terminfo description.
They are normally sent to the terminal, by the <EM>init</EM> option
- of the <STRONG>tput</STRONG> program, each time the user logs in. They
+ of the <STRONG>tput</STRONG> program, each time the user logs in. They
will be printed in the following order:
run the program
@@ -1919,107 +1920,107 @@
and finally
output <STRONG>is3</STRONG>.
- Most initialization is done with <STRONG>is2</STRONG>. Special terminal
+ Most initialization is done with <STRONG>is2</STRONG>. Special terminal
modes can be set up without duplicating strings by putting
- the common sequences in <STRONG>is2</STRONG> and special cases in <STRONG>is1</STRONG> and
+ the common sequences in <STRONG>is2</STRONG> and special cases in <STRONG>is1</STRONG> and
<STRONG>is3</STRONG>.
A set of sequences that does a harder reset from a totally
unknown state can be given as <STRONG>rs1</STRONG>, <STRONG>rs2</STRONG>, <STRONG>rf</STRONG> and <STRONG>rs3</STRONG>, analo-
- gous to <STRONG>is1</STRONG> <STRONG>,</STRONG> <STRONG>is2</STRONG> <STRONG>,</STRONG> <STRONG>if</STRONG> and <STRONG>is3</STRONG> respectively. These
- strings are output by the <STRONG>reset</STRONG> program, which is used
- when the terminal gets into a wedged state. Commands are
- normally placed in <STRONG>rs1</STRONG>, <STRONG>rs2</STRONG> <STRONG>rs3</STRONG> and <STRONG>rf</STRONG> only if they pro-
- duce annoying effects on the screen and are not necessary
- when logging in. For example, the command to set the
- vt100 into 80-column mode would normally be part of <STRONG>is2</STRONG>,
- but it causes an annoying glitch of the screen and is not
- normally needed since the terminal is usually already in
+ gous to <STRONG>is1</STRONG> <STRONG>,</STRONG> <STRONG>is2</STRONG> <STRONG>,</STRONG> <STRONG>if</STRONG> and <STRONG>is3</STRONG> respectively. These
+ strings are output by the <STRONG>reset</STRONG> program, which is used
+ when the terminal gets into a wedged state. Commands are
+ normally placed in <STRONG>rs1</STRONG>, <STRONG>rs2</STRONG> <STRONG>rs3</STRONG> and <STRONG>rf</STRONG> only if they pro-
+ duce annoying effects on the screen and are not necessary
+ when logging in. For example, the command to set the
+ vt100 into 80-column mode would normally be part of <STRONG>is2</STRONG>,
+ but it causes an annoying glitch of the screen and is not
+ normally needed since the terminal is usually already in
80 column mode.
The <STRONG>reset</STRONG> program writes strings including <STRONG>iprog</STRONG>, etc., in
- the same order as the <EM>init</EM> program, using <STRONG>rs1</STRONG>, etc.,
+ the same order as the <EM>init</EM> program, using <STRONG>rs1</STRONG>, etc.,
instead of <STRONG>is1</STRONG>, etc. If any of <STRONG>rs1</STRONG>, <STRONG>rs2</STRONG>, <STRONG>rs3</STRONG>, or <STRONG>rf</STRONG> reset
- capability strings are missing, the <STRONG>reset</STRONG> program falls
+ capability strings are missing, the <STRONG>reset</STRONG> program falls
back upon the corresponding initialization capability
string.
If there are commands to set and clear tab stops, they can
- be given as <STRONG>tbc</STRONG> (clear all tab stops) and <STRONG>hts</STRONG> (set a tab
- stop in the current column of every row). If a more com-
- plex sequence is needed to set the tabs than can be
- described by this, the sequence can be placed in <STRONG>is2</STRONG> or
+ be given as <STRONG>tbc</STRONG> (clear all tab stops) and <STRONG>hts</STRONG> (set a tab
+ stop in the current column of every row). If a more com-
+ plex sequence is needed to set the tabs than can be
+ described by this, the sequence can be placed in <STRONG>is2</STRONG> or
<STRONG>if</STRONG>.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Delays-and-Padding">Delays and Padding</a></H3><PRE>
- Many older and slower terminals do not support either
+ Many older and slower terminals do not support either
XON/XOFF or DTR handshaking, including hard copy terminals
- and some very archaic CRTs (including, for example, DEC
- VT100s). These may require padding characters after cer-
+ and some very archaic CRTs (including, for example, DEC
+ VT100s). These may require padding characters after cer-
tain cursor motions and screen changes.
If the terminal uses xon/xoff handshaking for flow control
- (that is, it automatically emits ^S back to the host when
+ (that is, it automatically emits ^S back to the host when
its input buffers are close to full), set <STRONG>xon</STRONG>. This capa-
- bility suppresses the emission of padding. You can also
- set it for memory-mapped console devices effectively that
- do not have a speed limit. Padding information should
- still be included so that routines can make better deci-
+ bility suppresses the emission of padding. You can also
+ set it for memory-mapped console devices effectively that
+ do not have a speed limit. Padding information should
+ still be included so that routines can make better deci-
sions about relative costs, but actual pad characters will
not be transmitted.
- If <STRONG>pb</STRONG> (padding baud rate) is given, padding is suppressed
- at baud rates below the value of <STRONG>pb</STRONG>. If the entry has no
- padding baud rate, then whether padding is emitted or not
+ If <STRONG>pb</STRONG> (padding baud rate) is given, padding is suppressed
+ at baud rates below the value of <STRONG>pb</STRONG>. If the entry has no
+ padding baud rate, then whether padding is emitted or not
is completely controlled by <STRONG>xon</STRONG>.
- If the terminal requires other than a null (zero) charac-
- ter as a pad, then this can be given as <STRONG>pad</STRONG>. Only the
+ If the terminal requires other than a null (zero) charac-
+ ter as a pad, then this can be given as <STRONG>pad</STRONG>. Only the
first character of the <STRONG>pad</STRONG> string is used.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Status-Lines">Status Lines</a></H3><PRE>
- Some terminals have an extra "status line" which is not
- normally used by software (and thus not counted in the
+ Some terminals have an extra "status line" which is not
+ normally used by software (and thus not counted in the
terminal's <STRONG>lines</STRONG> capability).
- The simplest case is a status line which is cursor-
- addressable but not part of the main scrolling region on
- the screen; the Heathkit H19 has a status line of this
- kind, as would a 24-line VT100 with a 23-line scrolling
- region set up on initialization. This situation is indi-
+ The simplest case is a status line which is cursor-
+ addressable but not part of the main scrolling region on
+ the screen; the Heathkit H19 has a status line of this
+ kind, as would a 24-line VT100 with a 23-line scrolling
+ region set up on initialization. This situation is indi-
cated by the <STRONG>hs</STRONG> capability.
Some terminals with status lines need special sequences to
- access the status line. These may be expressed as a
+ access the status line. These may be expressed as a
string with single parameter <STRONG>tsl</STRONG> which takes the cursor to
- a given zero-origin column on the status line. The capa-
+ a given zero-origin column on the status line. The capa-
bility <STRONG>fsl</STRONG> must return to the main-screen cursor positions
- before the last <STRONG>tsl</STRONG>. You may need to embed the string
- values of <STRONG>sc</STRONG> (save cursor) and <STRONG>rc</STRONG> (restore cursor) in <STRONG>tsl</STRONG>
+ before the last <STRONG>tsl</STRONG>. You may need to embed the string
+ values of <STRONG>sc</STRONG> (save cursor) and <STRONG>rc</STRONG> (restore cursor) in <STRONG>tsl</STRONG>
and <STRONG>fsl</STRONG> to accomplish this.
- The status line is normally assumed to be the same width
- as the width of the terminal. If this is untrue, you can
+ The status line is normally assumed to be the same width
+ as the width of the terminal. If this is untrue, you can
specify it with the numeric capability <STRONG>wsl</STRONG>.
- A command to erase or blank the status line may be speci-
+ A command to erase or blank the status line may be speci-
fied as <STRONG>dsl</STRONG>.
- The boolean capability <STRONG>eslok</STRONG> specifies that escape
+ The boolean capability <STRONG>eslok</STRONG> specifies that escape
sequences, tabs, etc., work ordinarily in the status line.
- The <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> implementation does not yet use any of these
- capabilities. They are documented here in case they ever
+ The <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> implementation does not yet use any of these
+ capabilities. They are documented here in case they ever
become important.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Line-Graphics">Line Graphics</a></H3><PRE>
- Many terminals have alternate character sets useful for
- forms-drawing. Terminfo and <STRONG>curses</STRONG> build in support for
- the drawing characters supported by the VT100, with some
- characters from the AT&amp;T 4410v1 added. This alternate
+ Many terminals have alternate character sets useful for
+ forms-drawing. Terminfo and <STRONG>curses</STRONG> build in support for
+ the drawing characters supported by the VT100, with some
+ characters from the AT&amp;T 4410v1 added. This alternate
character set may be specified by the <STRONG>acsc</STRONG> capability.
<STRONG>Glyph</STRONG> <STRONG>ACS</STRONG> <STRONG>Ascii</STRONG> <STRONG>VT100</STRONG>
@@ -2057,74 +2058,74 @@
upper right corner ACS_URCORNER + k
vertical line ACS_VLINE | x
- The best way to define a new device's graphics set is to
- add a column to a copy of this table for your terminal,
- giving the character which (when emitted between
- <STRONG>smacs</STRONG>/<STRONG>rmacs</STRONG> switches) will be rendered as the correspond-
- ing graphic. Then read off the VT100/your terminal char-
- acter pairs right to left in sequence; these become the
+ The best way to define a new device's graphics set is to
+ add a column to a copy of this table for your terminal,
+ giving the character which (when emitted between
+ <STRONG>smacs</STRONG>/<STRONG>rmacs</STRONG> switches) will be rendered as the correspond-
+ ing graphic. Then read off the VT100/your terminal char-
+ acter pairs right to left in sequence; these become the
ACSC string.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Color-Handling">Color Handling</a></H3><PRE>
- The curses library functions <STRONG>init_pair</STRONG> and <STRONG>init_color</STRONG>
- manipulate the <EM>color</EM> <EM>pairs</EM> and <EM>color</EM> <EM>values</EM> discussed in
- this section (see <STRONG><A HREF="curs_color.3x.html">curs_color(3x)</A></STRONG> for details on these and
+ The curses library functions <STRONG>init_pair</STRONG> and <STRONG>init_color</STRONG>
+ manipulate the <EM>color</EM> <EM>pairs</EM> and <EM>color</EM> <EM>values</EM> discussed in
+ this section (see <STRONG><A HREF="curs_color.3x.html">curs_color(3x)</A></STRONG> for details on these and
related functions).
- Most color terminals are either "Tektronix-like" or "HP-
+ Most color terminals are either "Tektronix-like" or "HP-
like":
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> Tektronix-like terminals have a predefined set of <EM>N</EM>
- colors (where <EM>N</EM> is usually 8), and can set character-
- cell foreground and background characters indepen-
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> Tektronix-like terminals have a predefined set of <EM>N</EM>
+ colors (where <EM>N</EM> is usually 8), and can set character-
+ cell foreground and background characters indepen-
dently, mixing them into <EM>N</EM> * <EM>N</EM> color-pairs.
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> On HP-like terminals, the user must set each color
- pair up separately (foreground and background are not
- independently settable). Up to <EM>M</EM> color-pairs may be
- set up from 2*<EM>M</EM> different colors. ANSI-compatible
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> On HP-like terminals, the user must set each color
+ pair up separately (foreground and background are not
+ independently settable). Up to <EM>M</EM> color-pairs may be
+ set up from 2*<EM>M</EM> different colors. ANSI-compatible
terminals are Tektronix-like.
Some basic color capabilities are independent of the color
method. The numeric capabilities <STRONG>colors</STRONG> and <STRONG>pairs</STRONG> specify
- the maximum numbers of colors and color-pairs that can be
- displayed simultaneously. The <STRONG>op</STRONG> (original pair) string
- resets foreground and background colors to their default
- values for the terminal. The <STRONG>oc</STRONG> string resets all colors
- or color-pairs to their default values for the terminal.
- Some terminals (including many PC terminal emulators)
- erase screen areas with the current background color
- rather than the power-up default background; these should
+ the maximum numbers of colors and color-pairs that can be
+ displayed simultaneously. The <STRONG>op</STRONG> (original pair) string
+ resets foreground and background colors to their default
+ values for the terminal. The <STRONG>oc</STRONG> string resets all colors
+ or color-pairs to their default values for the terminal.
+ Some terminals (including many PC terminal emulators)
+ erase screen areas with the current background color
+ rather than the power-up default background; these should
have the boolean capability <STRONG>bce</STRONG>.
- While the curses library works with <EM>color</EM> <EM>pairs</EM> (reflect-
- ing the inability of some devices to set foreground and
+ While the curses library works with <EM>color</EM> <EM>pairs</EM> (reflect-
+ ing the inability of some devices to set foreground and
background colors independently), there are separate capa-
bilities for setting these features:
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> To change the current foreground or background color
- on a Tektronix-type terminal, use <STRONG>setaf</STRONG> (set ANSI
- foreground) and <STRONG>setab</STRONG> (set ANSI background) or <STRONG>setf</STRONG>
- (set foreground) and <STRONG>setb</STRONG> (set background). These
- take one parameter, the color number. The SVr4 docu-
- mentation describes only <STRONG>setaf</STRONG>/<STRONG>setab</STRONG>; the XPG4 draft
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> To change the current foreground or background color
+ on a Tektronix-type terminal, use <STRONG>setaf</STRONG> (set ANSI
+ foreground) and <STRONG>setab</STRONG> (set ANSI background) or <STRONG>setf</STRONG>
+ (set foreground) and <STRONG>setb</STRONG> (set background). These
+ take one parameter, the color number. The SVr4 docu-
+ mentation describes only <STRONG>setaf</STRONG>/<STRONG>setab</STRONG>; the XPG4 draft
says that "If the terminal supports ANSI escape
sequences to set background and foreground, they
should be coded as <STRONG>setaf</STRONG> and <STRONG>setab</STRONG>, respectively.
<STRONG>o</STRONG> If the terminal supports other escape sequences to set
- background and foreground, they should be coded as
- <STRONG>setf</STRONG> and <STRONG>setb</STRONG>, respectively. The <STRONG>vidputs</STRONG> and the
- <STRONG>refresh</STRONG> functions use the <STRONG>setaf</STRONG> and <STRONG>setab</STRONG> capabilities
- if they are defined.
+ background and foreground, they should be coded as
+ <STRONG>setf</STRONG> and <STRONG>setb</STRONG>, respectively. The <STRONG>vidputs</STRONG> and the
+ <STRONG><A HREF="curs_refresh.3x.html">refresh(3x)</A></STRONG> functions use the <STRONG>setaf</STRONG> and <STRONG>setab</STRONG> capabil-
+ ities if they are defined.
- The <STRONG>setaf</STRONG>/<STRONG>setab</STRONG> and <STRONG>setf</STRONG>/<STRONG>setb</STRONG> capabilities take a single
+ The <STRONG>setaf</STRONG>/<STRONG>setab</STRONG> and <STRONG>setf</STRONG>/<STRONG>setb</STRONG> capabilities take a single
numeric argument each. Argument values 0-7 of <STRONG>setaf</STRONG>/<STRONG>setab</STRONG>
- are portably defined as follows (the middle column is the
+ are portably defined as follows (the middle column is the
symbolic #define available in the header for the <STRONG>curses</STRONG> or
- <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> libraries). The terminal hardware is free to map
- these as it likes, but the RGB values indicate normal
+ <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> libraries). The terminal hardware is free to map
+ these as it likes, but the RGB values indicate normal
locations in color space.
<STRONG>Color</STRONG> <STRONG>#define</STRONG> <STRONG>Value</STRONG> <STRONG>RGB</STRONG>
@@ -2135,9 +2136,10 @@
blue <STRONG>COLOR_BLUE</STRONG> 4 0,0,max
magenta <STRONG>COLOR_MAGENTA</STRONG> 5 max,0,max
cyan <STRONG>COLOR_CYAN</STRONG> 6 0,max,max
+
white <STRONG>COLOR_WHITE</STRONG> 7 max,max,max
- The argument values of <STRONG>setf</STRONG>/<STRONG>setb</STRONG> historically correspond
+ The argument values of <STRONG>setf</STRONG>/<STRONG>setb</STRONG> historically correspond
to a different mapping, i.e.,
<STRONG>Color</STRONG> <STRONG>#define</STRONG> <STRONG>Value</STRONG> <STRONG>RGB</STRONG>
@@ -2151,36 +2153,36 @@
white <STRONG>COLOR_WHITE</STRONG> 7 max,max,max
It is important to not confuse the two sets of color capa-
- bilities; otherwise red/blue will be interchanged on the
+ bilities; otherwise red/blue will be interchanged on the
display.
- On an HP-like terminal, use <STRONG>scp</STRONG> with a color-pair number
+ On an HP-like terminal, use <STRONG>scp</STRONG> with a color-pair number
parameter to set which color pair is current.
Some terminals allow the <EM>color</EM> <EM>values</EM> to be modified:
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> On a Tektronix-like terminal, the capability <STRONG>ccc</STRONG> may
- be present to indicate that colors can be modified.
- If so, the <STRONG>initc</STRONG> capability will take a color number
- (0 to <STRONG>colors</STRONG> - 1)and three more parameters which
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> On a Tektronix-like terminal, the capability <STRONG>ccc</STRONG> may
+ be present to indicate that colors can be modified.
+ If so, the <STRONG>initc</STRONG> capability will take a color number
+ (0 to <STRONG>colors</STRONG> - 1)and three more parameters which
describe the color. These three parameters default to
- being interpreted as RGB (Red, Green, Blue) values.
- If the boolean capability <STRONG>hls</STRONG> is present, they are
- instead as HLS (Hue, Lightness, Saturation) indices.
+ being interpreted as RGB (Red, Green, Blue) values.
+ If the boolean capability <STRONG>hls</STRONG> is present, they are
+ instead as HLS (Hue, Lightness, Saturation) indices.
The ranges are terminal-dependent.
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> On an HP-like terminal, <STRONG>initp</STRONG> may give a capability
- for changing a color-pair value. It will take seven
- parameters; a color-pair number (0 to <STRONG>max_pairs</STRONG> - 1),
- and two triples describing first background and then
- foreground colors. These parameters must be (Red,
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> On an HP-like terminal, <STRONG>initp</STRONG> may give a capability
+ for changing a color-pair value. It will take seven
+ parameters; a color-pair number (0 to <STRONG>max_pairs</STRONG> - 1),
+ and two triples describing first background and then
+ foreground colors. These parameters must be (Red,
Green, Blue) or (Hue, Lightness, Saturation) depending
on <STRONG>hls</STRONG>.
- On some color terminals, colors collide with highlights.
+ On some color terminals, colors collide with highlights.
You can register these collisions with the <STRONG>ncv</STRONG> capability.
- This is a bit-mask of attributes not to be used when col-
- ors are enabled. The correspondence with the attributes
+ This is a bit-mask of attributes not to be used when col-
+ ors are enabled. The correspondence with the attributes
understood by <STRONG>curses</STRONG> is as follows:
<STRONG>Attribute</STRONG> <STRONG>Bit</STRONG> <STRONG>Decimal</STRONG> <STRONG>Set</STRONG> <STRONG>by</STRONG>
@@ -2201,210 +2203,210 @@
A_VERTICAL 14 16384 sgr1
A_ITALIC 15 32768 sitm
- For example, on many IBM PC consoles, the underline
- attribute collides with the foreground color blue and is
- not available in color mode. These should have an <STRONG>ncv</STRONG>
+ For example, on many IBM PC consoles, the underline
+ attribute collides with the foreground color blue and is
+ not available in color mode. These should have an <STRONG>ncv</STRONG>
capability of 2.
- SVr4 curses does nothing with <STRONG>ncv</STRONG>, ncurses recognizes it
+ SVr4 curses does nothing with <STRONG>ncv</STRONG>, ncurses recognizes it
and optimizes the output in favor of colors.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Miscellaneous">Miscellaneous</a></H3><PRE>
- If the terminal requires other than a null (zero) charac-
- ter as a pad, then this can be given as pad. Only the
- first character of the pad string is used. If the termi-
+ If the terminal requires other than a null (zero) charac-
+ ter as a pad, then this can be given as pad. Only the
+ first character of the pad string is used. If the termi-
nal does not have a pad character, specify npc. Note that
- ncurses implements the termcap-compatible <STRONG>PC</STRONG> variable;
- though the application may set this value to something
- other than a null, ncurses will test <STRONG>npc</STRONG> first and use
+ ncurses implements the termcap-compatible <STRONG>PC</STRONG> variable;
+ though the application may set this value to something
+ other than a null, ncurses will test <STRONG>npc</STRONG> first and use
napms if the terminal has no pad character.
- If the terminal can move up or down half a line, this can
- be indicated with <STRONG>hu</STRONG> (half-line up) and <STRONG>hd</STRONG> (half-line
+ If the terminal can move up or down half a line, this can
+ be indicated with <STRONG>hu</STRONG> (half-line up) and <STRONG>hd</STRONG> (half-line
down). This is primarily useful for superscripts and sub-
- scripts on hard-copy terminals. If a hard-copy terminal
- can eject to the next page (form feed), give this as <STRONG>ff</STRONG>
+ scripts on hard-copy terminals. If a hard-copy terminal
+ can eject to the next page (form feed), give this as <STRONG>ff</STRONG>
(usually control L).
- If there is a command to repeat a given character a given
- number of times (to save time transmitting a large number
- of identical characters) this can be indicated with the
- parameterized string <STRONG>rep</STRONG>. The first parameter is the
- character to be repeated and the second is the number of
- times to repeat it. Thus, tparm(repeat_char, 'x', 10) is
+ If there is a command to repeat a given character a given
+ number of times (to save time transmitting a large number
+ of identical characters) this can be indicated with the
+ parameterized string <STRONG>rep</STRONG>. The first parameter is the
+ character to be repeated and the second is the number of
+ times to repeat it. Thus, tparm(repeat_char, 'x', 10) is
the same as "xxxxxxxxxx".
- If the terminal has a settable command character, such as
- the TEKTRONIX 4025, this can be indicated with <STRONG>cmdch</STRONG>. A
+ If the terminal has a settable command character, such as
+ the TEKTRONIX 4025, this can be indicated with <STRONG>cmdch</STRONG>. A
prototype command character is chosen which is used in all
- capabilities. This character is given in the <STRONG>cmdch</STRONG> capa-
- bility to identify it. The following convention is sup-
- ported on some UNIX systems: The environment is to be
- searched for a <STRONG>CC</STRONG> variable, and if found, all occurrences
+ capabilities. This character is given in the <STRONG>cmdch</STRONG> capa-
+ bility to identify it. The following convention is sup-
+ ported on some UNIX systems: The environment is to be
+ searched for a <STRONG>CC</STRONG> variable, and if found, all occurrences
of the prototype character are replaced with the character
in the environment variable.
- Terminal descriptions that do not represent a specific
+ Terminal descriptions that do not represent a specific
kind of known terminal, such as <EM>switch</EM>, <EM>dialup</EM>, <EM>patch</EM>, and
- <EM>network</EM>, should include the <STRONG>gn</STRONG> (generic) capability so
- that programs can complain that they do not know how to
- talk to the terminal. (This capability does not apply to
- <EM>virtual</EM> terminal descriptions for which the escape
+ <EM>network</EM>, should include the <STRONG>gn</STRONG> (generic) capability so
+ that programs can complain that they do not know how to
+ talk to the terminal. (This capability does not apply to
+ <EM>virtual</EM> terminal descriptions for which the escape
sequences are known.)
- If the terminal has a "meta key" which acts as a shift
- key, setting the 8th bit of any character transmitted,
- this fact can be indicated with <STRONG>km</STRONG>. Otherwise, software
+ If the terminal has a "meta key" which acts as a shift
+ key, setting the 8th bit of any character transmitted,
+ this fact can be indicated with <STRONG>km</STRONG>. Otherwise, software
will assume that the 8th bit is parity and it will usually
- be cleared. If strings exist to turn this "meta mode" on
+ be cleared. If strings exist to turn this "meta mode" on
and off, they can be given as <STRONG>smm</STRONG> and <STRONG>rmm</STRONG>.
- If the terminal has more lines of memory than will fit on
- the screen at once, the number of lines of memory can be
- indicated with <STRONG>lm</STRONG>. A value of <STRONG>lm</STRONG>#0 indicates that the
+ If the terminal has more lines of memory than will fit on
+ the screen at once, the number of lines of memory can be
+ indicated with <STRONG>lm</STRONG>. A value of <STRONG>lm</STRONG>#0 indicates that the
number of lines is not fixed, but that there is still more
memory than fits on the screen.
If the terminal is one of those supported by the UNIX vir-
- tual terminal protocol, the terminal number can be given
+ tual terminal protocol, the terminal number can be given
as <STRONG>vt</STRONG>.
Media copy strings which control an auxiliary printer con-
nected to the terminal can be given as <STRONG>mc0</STRONG>: print the con-
- tents of the screen, <STRONG>mc4</STRONG>: turn off the printer, and <STRONG>mc5</STRONG>:
- turn on the printer. When the printer is on, all text
- sent to the terminal will be sent to the printer. It is
+ tents of the screen, <STRONG>mc4</STRONG>: turn off the printer, and <STRONG>mc5</STRONG>:
+ turn on the printer. When the printer is on, all text
+ sent to the terminal will be sent to the printer. It is
undefined whether the text is also displayed on the termi-
nal screen when the printer is on. A variation <STRONG>mc5p</STRONG> takes
one parameter, and leaves the printer on for as many char-
- acters as the value of the parameter, then turns the
- printer off. The parameter should not exceed 255. All
+ acters as the value of the parameter, then turns the
+ printer off. The parameter should not exceed 255. All
text, including <STRONG>mc4</STRONG>, is transparently passed to the
printer while an <STRONG>mc5p</STRONG> is in effect.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Glitches-and-Braindamage">Glitches and Braindamage</a></H3><PRE>
- Hazeltine terminals, which do not allow "~" characters to
+ Hazeltine terminals, which do not allow "~" characters to
be displayed should indicate <STRONG>hz</STRONG>.
Terminals which ignore a line-feed immediately after an <STRONG>am</STRONG>
wrap, such as the Concept and vt100, should indicate <STRONG>xenl</STRONG>.
- If <STRONG>el</STRONG> is required to get rid of standout (instead of
- merely writing normal text on top of it), <STRONG>xhp</STRONG> should be
+ If <STRONG>el</STRONG> is required to get rid of standout (instead of
+ merely writing normal text on top of it), <STRONG>xhp</STRONG> should be
given.
- Teleray terminals, where tabs turn all characters moved
- over to blanks, should indicate <STRONG>xt</STRONG> (destructive tabs).
- Note: the variable indicating this is now
- "dest_tabs_magic_smso"; in older versions, it was tel-
+ Teleray terminals, where tabs turn all characters moved
+ over to blanks, should indicate <STRONG>xt</STRONG> (destructive tabs).
+ Note: the variable indicating this is now
+ "dest_tabs_magic_smso"; in older versions, it was tel-
eray_glitch. This glitch is also taken to mean that it is
- not possible to position the cursor on top of a "magic
- cookie", that to erase standout mode it is instead neces-
+ not possible to position the cursor on top of a "magic
+ cookie", that to erase standout mode it is instead neces-
sary to use delete and insert line. The ncurses implemen-
tation ignores this glitch.
- The Beehive Superbee, which is unable to correctly trans-
- mit the escape or control C characters, has <STRONG>xsb</STRONG>, indicat-
- ing that the f1 key is used for escape and f2 for control
- C. (Only certain Superbees have this problem, depending
- on the ROM.) Note that in older terminfo versions, this
- capability was called "beehive_glitch"; it is now
+ The Beehive Superbee, which is unable to correctly trans-
+ mit the escape or control C characters, has <STRONG>xsb</STRONG>, indicat-
+ ing that the f1 key is used for escape and f2 for control
+ C. (Only certain Superbees have this problem, depending
+ on the ROM.) Note that in older terminfo versions, this
+ capability was called "beehive_glitch"; it is now
"no_esc_ctl_c".
- Other specific terminal problems may be corrected by
+ Other specific terminal problems may be corrected by
adding more capabilities of the form <STRONG>x</STRONG><EM>x</EM>.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Similar-Terminals">Similar Terminals</a></H3><PRE>
If there are two very similar terminals, one (the variant)
- can be defined as being just like the other (the base)
- with certain exceptions. In the definition of the vari-
- ant, the string capability <STRONG>use</STRONG> can be given with the name
- of the base terminal. The capabilities given before <STRONG>use</STRONG>
- override those in the base type named by <STRONG>use</STRONG>. If there
- are multiple <STRONG>use</STRONG> capabilities, they are merged in reverse
- order. That is, the rightmost <STRONG>use</STRONG> reference is processed
- first, then the one to its left, and so forth. Capabili-
- ties given explicitly in the entry override those brought
+ can be defined as being just like the other (the base)
+ with certain exceptions. In the definition of the vari-
+ ant, the string capability <STRONG>use</STRONG> can be given with the name
+ of the base terminal. The capabilities given before <STRONG>use</STRONG>
+ override those in the base type named by <STRONG>use</STRONG>. If there
+ are multiple <STRONG>use</STRONG> capabilities, they are merged in reverse
+ order. That is, the rightmost <STRONG>use</STRONG> reference is processed
+ first, then the one to its left, and so forth. Capabili-
+ ties given explicitly in the entry override those brought
in by <STRONG>use</STRONG> references.
A capability can be canceled by placing <STRONG>xx@</STRONG> to the left of
- the use reference that imports it, where <EM>xx</EM> is the capa-
+ the use reference that imports it, where <EM>xx</EM> is the capa-
bility. For example, the entry
2621-nl, smkx@, rmkx@, use=2621,
- defines a 2621-nl that does not have the <STRONG>smkx</STRONG> or <STRONG>rmkx</STRONG>
- capabilities, and hence does not turn on the function key
- labels when in visual mode. This is useful for different
+ defines a 2621-nl that does not have the <STRONG>smkx</STRONG> or <STRONG>rmkx</STRONG>
+ capabilities, and hence does not turn on the function key
+ labels when in visual mode. This is useful for different
modes for a terminal, or for different user preferences.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Pitfalls-of-Long-Entries">Pitfalls of Long Entries</a></H3><PRE>
- Long terminfo entries are unlikely to be a problem; to
- date, no entry has even approached terminfo's 4096-byte
+ Long terminfo entries are unlikely to be a problem; to
+ date, no entry has even approached terminfo's 4096-byte
string-table maximum. Unfortunately, the termcap transla-
tions are much more strictly limited (to 1023 bytes), thus
- termcap translations of long terminfo entries can cause
+ termcap translations of long terminfo entries can cause
problems.
- The man pages for 4.3BSD and older versions of <STRONG>tgetent</STRONG>
- instruct the user to allocate a 1024-byte buffer for the
- termcap entry. The entry gets null-terminated by the
+ The man pages for 4.3BSD and older versions of <STRONG>tgetent</STRONG>
+ instruct the user to allocate a 1024-byte buffer for the
+ termcap entry. The entry gets null-terminated by the
termcap library, so that makes the maximum safe length for
- a termcap entry 1k-1 (1023) bytes. Depending on what the
- application and the termcap library being used does, and
- where in the termcap file the terminal type that <STRONG>tgetent</STRONG>
+ a termcap entry 1k-1 (1023) bytes. Depending on what the
+ application and the termcap library being used does, and
+ where in the termcap file the terminal type that <STRONG>tgetent</STRONG>
is searching for is, several bad things can happen.
- Some termcap libraries print a warning message or exit if
- they find an entry that's longer than 1023 bytes; others
- do not; others truncate the entries to 1023 bytes. Some
+ Some termcap libraries print a warning message or exit if
+ they find an entry that's longer than 1023 bytes; others
+ do not; others truncate the entries to 1023 bytes. Some
application programs allocate more than the recommended 1K
for the termcap entry; others do not.
Each termcap entry has two important sizes associated with
it: before "tc" expansion, and after "tc" expansion. "tc"
- is the capability that tacks on another termcap entry to
- the end of the current one, to add on its capabilities.
- If a termcap entry does not use the "tc" capability, then
+ is the capability that tacks on another termcap entry to
+ the end of the current one, to add on its capabilities.
+ If a termcap entry does not use the "tc" capability, then
of course the two lengths are the same.
- The "before tc expansion" length is the most important
- one, because it affects more than just users of that par-
- ticular terminal. This is the length of the entry as it
+ The "before tc expansion" length is the most important
+ one, because it affects more than just users of that par-
+ ticular terminal. This is the length of the entry as it
exists in /etc/termcap, minus the backslash-newline pairs,
- which <STRONG>tgetent</STRONG> strips out while reading it. Some termcap
- libraries strip off the final newline, too (GNU termcap
+ which <STRONG>tgetent</STRONG> strips out while reading it. Some termcap
+ libraries strip off the final newline, too (GNU termcap
does not). Now suppose:
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> a termcap entry before expansion is more than 1023
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> a termcap entry before expansion is more than 1023
bytes long,
<STRONG>o</STRONG> and the application has only allocated a 1k buffer,
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> and the termcap library (like the one in BSD/OS 1.1
- and GNU) reads the whole entry into the buffer, no
- matter what its length, to see if it is the entry it
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> and the termcap library (like the one in BSD/OS 1.1
+ and GNU) reads the whole entry into the buffer, no
+ matter what its length, to see if it is the entry it
wants,
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> and <STRONG>tgetent</STRONG> is searching for a terminal type that
- either is the long entry, appears in the termcap file
- after the long entry, or does not appear in the file
- at all (so that <STRONG>tgetent</STRONG> has to search the whole term-
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> and <STRONG>tgetent</STRONG> is searching for a terminal type that
+ either is the long entry, appears in the termcap file
+ after the long entry, or does not appear in the file
+ at all (so that <STRONG>tgetent</STRONG> has to search the whole term-
cap file).
Then <STRONG>tgetent</STRONG> will overwrite memory, perhaps its stack, and
- probably core dump the program. Programs like telnet are
- particularly vulnerable; modern telnets pass along values
- like the terminal type automatically. The results are
- almost as undesirable with a termcap library, like SunOS
+ probably core dump the program. Programs like telnet are
+ particularly vulnerable; modern telnets pass along values
+ like the terminal type automatically. The results are
+ almost as undesirable with a termcap library, like SunOS
4.1.3 and Ultrix 4.4, that prints warning messages when it
- reads an overly long termcap entry. If a termcap library
- truncates long entries, like OSF/1 3.0, it is immune to
- dying here but will return incorrect data for the termi-
+ reads an overly long termcap entry. If a termcap library
+ truncates long entries, like OSF/1 3.0, it is immune to
+ dying here but will return incorrect data for the termi-
nal.
The "after tc expansion" length will have a similar effect
@@ -2414,27 +2416,27 @@
while searching.
In summary, a termcap entry that is longer than 1023 bytes
- can cause, on various combinations of termcap libraries
- and applications, a core dump, warnings, or incorrect
- operation. If it is too long even before "tc" expansion,
+ can cause, on various combinations of termcap libraries
+ and applications, a core dump, warnings, or incorrect
+ operation. If it is too long even before "tc" expansion,
it will have this effect even for users of some other ter-
- minal types and users whose TERM variable does not have a
+ minal types and users whose TERM variable does not have a
termcap entry.
When in -C (translate to termcap) mode, the <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> imple-
mentation of <STRONG><A HREF="tic.1m.html">tic(1m)</A></STRONG> issues warning messages when the pre-
- tc length of a termcap translation is too long. The -c
- (check) option also checks resolved (after tc expansion)
+ tc length of a termcap translation is too long. The -c
+ (check) option also checks resolved (after tc expansion)
lengths.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-Binary-Compatibility">Binary Compatibility</a></H3><PRE>
- It is not wise to count on portability of binary terminfo
- entries between commercial UNIX versions. The problem is
- that there are at least two versions of terminfo (under
+ It is not wise to count on portability of binary terminfo
+ entries between commercial UNIX versions. The problem is
+ that there are at least two versions of terminfo (under
HP-UX and AIX) which diverged from System V terminfo after
- SVr1, and have added extension capabilities to the string
- table that (in the binary format) collide with System V
+ SVr1, and have added extension capabilities to the string
+ table that (in the binary format) collide with System V
and XSI Curses extensions.
@@ -2442,66 +2444,66 @@
Searching for terminal descriptions in <STRONG>$HOME/.terminfo</STRONG> and
TERMINFO_DIRS is not supported by older implementations.
- Some SVr4 <STRONG>curses</STRONG> implementations, and all previous to
- SVr4, do not interpret the %A and %O operators in parame-
+ Some SVr4 <STRONG>curses</STRONG> implementations, and all previous to
+ SVr4, do not interpret the %A and %O operators in parame-
ter strings.
- SVr4/XPG4 do not specify whether <STRONG>msgr</STRONG> licenses movement
- while in an alternate-character-set mode (such modes may,
- among other things, map CR and NL to characters that do
- not trigger local motions). The <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> implementation
- ignores <STRONG>msgr</STRONG> in <STRONG>ALTCHARSET</STRONG> mode. This raises the possi-
- bility that an XPG4 implementation making the opposite
- interpretation may need terminfo entries made for <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG>
+ SVr4/XPG4 do not specify whether <STRONG>msgr</STRONG> licenses movement
+ while in an alternate-character-set mode (such modes may,
+ among other things, map CR and NL to characters that do
+ not trigger local motions). The <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> implementation
+ ignores <STRONG>msgr</STRONG> in <STRONG>ALTCHARSET</STRONG> mode. This raises the possi-
+ bility that an XPG4 implementation making the opposite
+ interpretation may need terminfo entries made for <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG>
to have <STRONG>msgr</STRONG> turned off.
- The <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> library handles insert-character and insert-
+ The <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> library handles insert-character and insert-
character modes in a slightly non-standard way to get bet-
- ter update efficiency. See the <STRONG>Insert/Delete</STRONG> <STRONG>Character</STRONG>
+ ter update efficiency. See the <STRONG>Insert/Delete</STRONG> <STRONG>Character</STRONG>
subsection above.
- The parameter substitutions for <STRONG>set_clock</STRONG> and <STRONG>dis-</STRONG>
- <STRONG>play_clock</STRONG> are not documented in SVr4 or the XSI Curses
+ The parameter substitutions for <STRONG>set_clock</STRONG> and <STRONG>dis-</STRONG>
+ <STRONG>play_clock</STRONG> are not documented in SVr4 or the XSI Curses
standard. They are deduced from the documentation for the
AT&amp;T 505 terminal.
- Be careful assigning the <STRONG>kmous</STRONG> capability. The <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG>
- wants to interpret it as <STRONG>KEY_MOUSE</STRONG>, for use by terminals
- and emulators like xterm that can return mouse-tracking
+ Be careful assigning the <STRONG>kmous</STRONG> capability. The <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG>
+ wants to interpret it as <STRONG>KEY_MOUSE</STRONG>, for use by terminals
+ and emulators like xterm that can return mouse-tracking
information in the keyboard-input stream.
X/Open Curses does not mention italics. Portable applica-
- tions must assume that numeric capabilities are signed
- 16-bit values. This includes the <EM>no</EM><STRONG>_</STRONG><EM>color</EM><STRONG>_</STRONG><EM>video</EM> (ncv)
- capability. The 32768 mask value used for italics with
- ncv can be confused with an absent or cancelled ncv. If
- italics should work with colors, then the ncv value must
+ tions must assume that numeric capabilities are signed
+ 16-bit values. This includes the <EM>no</EM><STRONG>_</STRONG><EM>color</EM><STRONG>_</STRONG><EM>video</EM> (ncv)
+ capability. The 32768 mask value used for italics with
+ ncv can be confused with an absent or cancelled ncv. If
+ italics should work with colors, then the ncv value must
be specified, even if it is zero.
- Different commercial ports of terminfo and curses support
- different subsets of the XSI Curses standard and (in some
+ Different commercial ports of terminfo and curses support
+ different subsets of the XSI Curses standard and (in some
cases) different extension sets. Here is a summary, accu-
rate as of October 1995:
<STRONG>SVR4,</STRONG> <STRONG>Solaris,</STRONG> <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> -- These support all SVr4 capabili-
ties.
- <STRONG>SGI</STRONG> -- Supports the SVr4 set, adds one undocumented
+ <STRONG>SGI</STRONG> -- Supports the SVr4 set, adds one undocumented
extended string capability (<STRONG>set_pglen</STRONG>).
- <STRONG>SVr1,</STRONG> <STRONG>Ultrix</STRONG> -- These support a restricted subset of ter-
- minfo capabilities. The booleans end with <STRONG>xon_xoff</STRONG>; the
- numerics with <STRONG>width_status_line</STRONG>; and the strings with
+ <STRONG>SVr1,</STRONG> <STRONG>Ultrix</STRONG> -- These support a restricted subset of ter-
+ minfo capabilities. The booleans end with <STRONG>xon_xoff</STRONG>; the
+ numerics with <STRONG>width_status_line</STRONG>; and the strings with
<STRONG>prtr_non</STRONG>.
- <STRONG>HP/UX</STRONG> -- Supports the SVr1 subset, plus the SVr[234]
+ <STRONG>HP/UX</STRONG> -- Supports the SVr1 subset, plus the SVr[234]
numerics <STRONG>num_labels</STRONG>, <STRONG>label_height</STRONG>, <STRONG>label_width</STRONG>, plus func-
- tion keys 11 through 63, plus <STRONG>plab_norm</STRONG>, <STRONG>label_on</STRONG>, and
+ tion keys 11 through 63, plus <STRONG>plab_norm</STRONG>, <STRONG>label_on</STRONG>, and
<STRONG>label_off</STRONG>, plus some incompatible extensions in the string
table.
- <STRONG>AIX</STRONG> -- Supports the SVr1 subset, plus function keys 11
- through 63, plus a number of incompatible string table
+ <STRONG>AIX</STRONG> -- Supports the SVr1 subset, plus function keys 11
+ through 63, plus a number of incompatible string table
extensions.
<STRONG>OSF</STRONG> -- Supports both the SVr4 set and the AIX extensions.
@@ -2518,7 +2520,7 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-AUTHORS">AUTHORS</a></H2><PRE>
- Zeyd M. Ben-Halim, Eric S. Raymond, Thomas E. Dickey.
+ Zeyd M. Ben-Halim, Eric S. Raymond, Thomas E. Dickey.
Based on pcurses by Pavel Curtis.
Index: doc/html/man/tic.1m.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/tic.1m.html 2016-12-31 21:41:38.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/tic.1m.html 2017-01-07 20:05:43.000000000 +0000
@@ -401,7 +401,7 @@
<STRONG><A HREF="infocmp.1m.html">infocmp(1m)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="captoinfo.1m.html">captoinfo(1m)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="infotocap.1m.html">infotocap(1m)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="toe.1m.html">toe(1m)</A></STRONG>,
<STRONG><A HREF="ncurses.3x.html">curses(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="term.5.html">term(5)</A></STRONG>. <STRONG><A HREF="terminfo.5.html">terminfo(5)</A></STRONG>.
- This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20161231).
+ This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20170107).
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-AUTHOR">AUTHOR</a></H2><PRE>
Index: doc/html/man/toe.1m.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/toe.1m.html 2016-12-31 21:41:38.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/toe.1m.html 2017-01-07 20:05:43.000000000 +0000
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@
<STRONG><A HREF="tic.1m.html">tic(1m)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="infocmp.1m.html">infocmp(1m)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="captoinfo.1m.html">captoinfo(1m)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="infotocap.1m.html">infotocap(1m)</A></STRONG>,
<STRONG><A HREF="ncurses.3x.html">curses(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="terminfo.5.html">terminfo(5)</A></STRONG>.
- This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20161231).
+ This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20170107).
Index: doc/html/man/tput.1.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/tput.1.html 2016-12-31 21:41:38.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/tput.1.html 2017-01-07 23:09:13.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
<!--
* t
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2012,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: tput.1,v 1.46 2016/10/22 19:57:25 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: tput.1,v 1.50 2017/01/07 23:03:28 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@
Again, <STRONG>tput</STRONG> uses a table and the presence of param-
eters in its input to decide whether to use
- <STRONG><A HREF="tparm.3x.html">tparm(3x)</A></STRONG>, and how to interpret the parameters.
+ <STRONG><A HREF="curs_terminfo.3x.html">tparm(3x)</A></STRONG>, and how to interpret the parameters.
<STRONG>-V</STRONG> reports the version of ncurses which was used in
this program, and exits.
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@
Most parameters are numbers. Only a few terminfo
capabilities require string parameters; <STRONG>tput</STRONG> uses a
table to decide which to pass as strings. Normally
- <STRONG>tput</STRONG> uses <STRONG><A HREF="tparm.3x.html">tparm(3x)</A></STRONG> to perform the substitution.
+ <STRONG>tput</STRONG> uses <STRONG><A HREF="curs_terminfo.3x.html">tparm(3x)</A></STRONG> to perform the substitution.
If no parameters are given for the capability, <STRONG>tput</STRONG>
writes the string without performing the substitu-
tion.
@@ -135,30 +135,72 @@
for the user's terminal exists (see <STRONG>-T</STRONG><EM>type</EM>, above),
the following will occur:
- (1) if present, the terminal's initialization
- strings will be output as detailed in the <STRONG>ter-</STRONG>
- <STRONG><A HREF="terminfo.5.html">minfo(5)</A></STRONG> section on <EM>Tabs</EM> <EM>and</EM> <EM>Initialization</EM>,
+ (1) first, <STRONG>tput</STRONG> retrieves the current terminal
+ mode settings for your terminal. It does this
+ by successively testing
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> the standard error,
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> standard output,
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> standard input and
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> ultimately "/dev/tty"
- (2) any delays (e.g., newline) specified in the
- entry will be set in the tty driver,
+ to obtain terminal settings. Having retrieved
+ these settings, <STRONG>tput</STRONG> remembers which file
+ descriptor to use when updating settings.
- (3) tabs expansion will be turned on or off
- according to the specification in the entry,
- and
+ (2) if the window size cannot be obtained from the
+ operating system, but the terminal description
+ (or environment, e.g., <STRONG>LINES</STRONG> and <STRONG>COLUMNS</STRONG> vari-
+ ables specify this), update the operating sys-
+ tem's notion of the window size.
- (4) if tabs are not expanded, standard tabs will
- be set (every 8 spaces).
+ (3) the terminal modes will be updated:
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> any delays (e.g., newline) specified in
+ the entry will be set in the tty driver,
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> tabs expansion will be turned on or off
+ according to the specification in the
+ entry, and
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> if tabs are not expanded, standard tabs
+ will be set (every 8 spaces).
+
+ (4) if present, the terminal's initialization
+ strings will be output as detailed in the <STRONG>ter-</STRONG>
+ <STRONG><A HREF="terminfo.5.html">minfo(5)</A></STRONG> section on <EM>Tabs</EM> <EM>and</EM> <EM>Initialization</EM>,
+
+ (5) output is flushed.
If an entry does not contain the information needed
for any of these activities, that activity will
silently be skipped.
- <STRONG>reset</STRONG> Instead of putting out initialization strings, the
- terminal's reset strings will be output if present
- (<STRONG>rs1</STRONG>, <STRONG>rs2</STRONG>, <STRONG>rs3</STRONG>, <STRONG>rf</STRONG>). If the reset strings are not
- present, but initialization strings are, the ini-
- tialization strings will be output. Otherwise,
- <STRONG>reset</STRONG> acts identically to <STRONG>init</STRONG>.
+ <STRONG>reset</STRONG> This is similar to <STRONG>init</STRONG>, with two differences:
+
+ (1) before any other initialization, the terminal
+ modes will be reset to a "sane" state:
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> set cooked and echo modes,
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> turn off cbreak and raw modes,
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> turn on newline translation and
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> reset any unset special characters to
+ their default values
+
+ (2) Instead of putting out <EM>initialization</EM> strings,
+ the terminal's <EM>reset</EM> strings will be output if
+ present (<STRONG>rs1</STRONG>, <STRONG>rs2</STRONG>, <STRONG>rs3</STRONG>, <STRONG>rf</STRONG>). If the <EM>reset</EM>
+ strings are not present, but <EM>initialization</EM>
+ strings are, the <EM>initialization</EM> strings will
+ be output.
+
+ Otherwise, <STRONG>reset</STRONG> acts identically to <STRONG>init</STRONG>.
<STRONG>longname</STRONG>
If the <STRONG>terminfo</STRONG> database is present and an entry
@@ -194,22 +236,39 @@
because of this difference with resetting terminal
modes and special characters.
+ With the changes made for ncurses 6.1, the <EM>reset</EM> feature
+ of the two programs is (mostly) the same. A few differ-
+ ences remain:
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> The <STRONG>tset</STRONG> program waits one second when resetting, in
+ case it happens to be a hardware terminal.
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> The two programs write the terminal initialization
+ strings to different streams (i.e.,. the standard
+ error for <STRONG>tset</STRONG> and the standard output for <STRONG>tput</STRONG>).
+
+ <STRONG>Note:</STRONG> although these programs write to different
+ streams, redirecting their output to a file will cap-
+ ture only part of their actions. The changes to the
+ terminal modes are not affected by redirecting the
+ output.
+
If <STRONG>tput</STRONG> is invoked by a link named <STRONG>init</STRONG>, this has the same
- effect as <STRONG>tput</STRONG> <STRONG>init</STRONG>. Again, you are less likely to use
- that link because another program named <STRONG>init</STRONG> has a more
+ effect as <STRONG>tput</STRONG> <STRONG>init</STRONG>. Again, you are less likely to use
+ that link because another program named <STRONG>init</STRONG> has a more
well-established use.
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-EXAMPLES">EXAMPLES</a></H2><PRE>
<STRONG>tput</STRONG> <STRONG>init</STRONG>
Initialize the terminal according to the type of ter-
- minal in the environmental variable <STRONG>TERM</STRONG>. This com-
- mand should be included in everyone's .profile after
+ minal in the environmental variable <STRONG>TERM</STRONG>. This com-
+ mand should be included in everyone's .profile after
the environmental variable <STRONG>TERM</STRONG> has been exported, as
illustrated on the <STRONG>profile(5)</STRONG> manual page.
<STRONG>tput</STRONG> <STRONG>-T5620</STRONG> <STRONG>reset</STRONG>
- Reset an AT&amp;T 5620 terminal, overriding the type of
+ Reset an AT&amp;T 5620 terminal, overriding the type of
terminal in the environmental variable <STRONG>TERM</STRONG>.
<STRONG>tput</STRONG> <STRONG>cup</STRONG> <STRONG>0</STRONG> <STRONG>0</STRONG>
@@ -230,16 +289,16 @@
<STRONG>bold=`tput</STRONG> <STRONG>smso`</STRONG> <STRONG>offbold=`tput</STRONG> <STRONG>rmso`</STRONG>
Set the shell variables <STRONG>bold</STRONG>, to begin stand-out mode
sequence, and <STRONG>offbold</STRONG>, to end standout mode sequence,
- for the current terminal. This might be followed by
- a prompt: <STRONG>echo</STRONG> <STRONG>"${bold}Please</STRONG> <STRONG>type</STRONG> <STRONG>in</STRONG> <STRONG>your</STRONG> <STRONG>name:</STRONG>
+ for the current terminal. This might be followed by
+ a prompt: <STRONG>echo</STRONG> <STRONG>"${bold}Please</STRONG> <STRONG>type</STRONG> <STRONG>in</STRONG> <STRONG>your</STRONG> <STRONG>name:</STRONG>
<STRONG>${offbold}\c"</STRONG>
<STRONG>tput</STRONG> <STRONG>hc</STRONG>
- Set exit code to indicate if the current terminal is
+ Set exit code to indicate if the current terminal is
a hard copy terminal.
<STRONG>tput</STRONG> <STRONG>cup</STRONG> <STRONG>23</STRONG> <STRONG>4</STRONG>
- Send the sequence to move the cursor to row 23, col-
+ Send the sequence to move the cursor to row 23, col-
umn 4.
<STRONG>tput</STRONG> <STRONG>cup</STRONG>
@@ -247,8 +306,8 @@
parameters substituted.
<STRONG>tput</STRONG> <STRONG>longname</STRONG>
- Print the long name from the <STRONG>terminfo</STRONG> database for
- the type of terminal specified in the environmental
+ Print the long name from the <STRONG>terminfo</STRONG> database for
+ the type of terminal specified in the environmental
variable <STRONG>TERM</STRONG>.
<STRONG>tput</STRONG> <STRONG>-S</STRONG> <STRONG>&lt;&lt;!</STRONG>
@@ -257,10 +316,10 @@
<STRONG>&gt;</STRONG> <STRONG>bold</STRONG>
<STRONG>&gt;</STRONG> <STRONG>!</STRONG>
- This example shows <STRONG>tput</STRONG> processing several capabili-
- ties in one invocation. It clears the screen, moves
- the cursor to position 10, 10 and turns on bold
- (extra bright) mode. The list is terminated by an
+ This example shows <STRONG>tput</STRONG> processing several capabili-
+ ties in one invocation. It clears the screen, moves
+ the cursor to position 10, 10 and turns on bold
+ (extra bright) mode. The list is terminated by an
exclamation mark (<STRONG>!</STRONG>) on a line by itself.
@@ -270,44 +329,44 @@
<STRONG>/usr/share/tabset/*</STRONG>
tab settings for some terminals, in a format appro-
- priate to be output to the terminal (escape
- sequences that set margins and tabs); for more
- information, see the <EM>Tabs</EM> <EM>and</EM> <EM>Initialization</EM>, sec-
+ priate to be output to the terminal (escape
+ sequences that set margins and tabs); for more
+ information, see the <EM>Tabs</EM> <EM>and</EM> <EM>Initialization</EM>, sec-
tion of <STRONG><A HREF="terminfo.5.html">terminfo(5)</A></STRONG>
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-EXIT-CODES">EXIT CODES</a></H2><PRE>
If the <STRONG>-S</STRONG> option is used, <STRONG>tput</STRONG> checks for errors from each
- line, and if any errors are found, will set the exit code
- to 4 plus the number of lines with errors. If no errors
- are found, the exit code is <STRONG>0</STRONG>. No indication of which
+ line, and if any errors are found, will set the exit code
+ to 4 plus the number of lines with errors. If no errors
+ are found, the exit code is <STRONG>0</STRONG>. No indication of which
line failed can be given so exit code <STRONG>1</STRONG> will never appear.
- Exit codes <STRONG>2</STRONG>, <STRONG>3</STRONG>, and <STRONG>4</STRONG> retain their usual interpretation.
+ Exit codes <STRONG>2</STRONG>, <STRONG>3</STRONG>, and <STRONG>4</STRONG> retain their usual interpretation.
If the <STRONG>-S</STRONG> option is not used, the exit code depends on the
type of <EM>capname</EM>:
<EM>boolean</EM>
a value of <STRONG>0</STRONG> is set for TRUE and <STRONG>1</STRONG> for FALSE.
- <EM>string</EM> a value of <STRONG>0</STRONG> is set if the <EM>capname</EM> is defined
- for this terminal <EM>type</EM> (the value of <EM>capname</EM> is
- returned on standard output); a value of <STRONG>1</STRONG> is
- set if <EM>capname</EM> is not defined for this terminal
+ <EM>string</EM> a value of <STRONG>0</STRONG> is set if the <EM>capname</EM> is defined
+ for this terminal <EM>type</EM> (the value of <EM>capname</EM> is
+ returned on standard output); a value of <STRONG>1</STRONG> is
+ set if <EM>capname</EM> is not defined for this terminal
<EM>type</EM> (nothing is written to standard output).
<EM>integer</EM>
- a value of <STRONG>0</STRONG> is always set, whether or not <EM>cap-</EM>
- <EM>name</EM> is defined for this terminal <EM>type</EM>. To
- determine if <EM>capname</EM> is defined for this termi-
- nal <EM>type</EM>, the user must test the value written
- to standard output. A value of <STRONG>-1</STRONG> means that
+ a value of <STRONG>0</STRONG> is always set, whether or not <EM>cap-</EM>
+ <EM>name</EM> is defined for this terminal <EM>type</EM>. To
+ determine if <EM>capname</EM> is defined for this termi-
+ nal <EM>type</EM>, the user must test the value written
+ to standard output. A value of <STRONG>-1</STRONG> means that
<EM>capname</EM> is not defined for this terminal <EM>type</EM>.
- <EM>other</EM> <STRONG>reset</STRONG> or <STRONG>init</STRONG> may fail to find their respective
- files. In that case, the exit code is set to 4
+ <EM>other</EM> <STRONG>reset</STRONG> or <STRONG>init</STRONG> may fail to find their respective
+ files. In that case, the exit code is set to 4
+ <STRONG>errno</STRONG>.
- Any other exit code indicates an error; see the DIAGNOS-
+ Any other exit code indicates an error; see the DIAGNOS-
TICS section.
@@ -317,8 +376,8 @@
exit code error message
---------------------------------------------------------------------
- <STRONG>0</STRONG> (<EM>capname</EM> is a numeric variable that is not specified in
- the <STRONG><A HREF="terminfo.5.html">terminfo(5)</A></STRONG> database for this terminal type, e.g.
+ <STRONG>0</STRONG> (<EM>capname</EM> is a numeric variable that is not specified in
+ the <STRONG><A HREF="terminfo.5.html">terminfo(5)</A></STRONG> database for this terminal type, e.g.
<STRONG>tput</STRONG> <STRONG>-T450</STRONG> <STRONG>lines</STRONG> and <STRONG>tput</STRONG> <STRONG>-T2621</STRONG> <STRONG>xmc</STRONG>)
<STRONG>1</STRONG> no error message is printed, see the <STRONG>EXIT</STRONG> <STRONG>CODES</STRONG> section.
<STRONG>2</STRONG> usage error
@@ -329,119 +388,119 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-HISTORY">HISTORY</a></H2><PRE>
- The <STRONG>tput</STRONG> command was begun by Bill Joy in 1980. The ini-
+ The <STRONG>tput</STRONG> command was begun by Bill Joy in 1980. The ini-
tial version only cleared the screen.
- AT&amp;T System V provided a different <STRONG>tput</STRONG> command, whose
- <STRONG>init</STRONG> and <STRONG>reset</STRONG> subcommands (more than half the program)
+ AT&amp;T System V provided a different <STRONG>tput</STRONG> command, whose
+ <STRONG>init</STRONG> and <STRONG>reset</STRONG> subcommands (more than half the program)
were incorporated from the <STRONG>reset</STRONG> feature of BSD <STRONG>tset</STRONG> writ-
- ten by Eric Allman. Later the corresponding source code
- for <EM>reset</EM> was removed from the BSD <STRONG>tset</STRONG> (in June 1993,
+ ten by Eric Allman. Later the corresponding source code
+ for <EM>reset</EM> was removed from the BSD <STRONG>tset</STRONG> (in June 1993,
released in 4.4BSD-Lite a year later).
- Keith Bostic replaced the BSD <STRONG>tput</STRONG> command in 1989 with a
- new implementation based on the AT&amp;T System V program
- <STRONG>tput</STRONG>. Like the AT&amp;T program, Bostic's version accepted
- some parameters named for <EM>terminfo</EM> <EM>capabilities</EM> (<STRONG>clear</STRONG>,
- <STRONG>init</STRONG>, <STRONG>longname</STRONG> and <STRONG>reset</STRONG>). However (because he had only
- termcap available), it accepted <EM>termcap</EM> <EM>names</EM> for other
- capabilities. Also, Bostic's BSD <STRONG>tput</STRONG> did not modify the
+ Keith Bostic replaced the BSD <STRONG>tput</STRONG> command in 1989 with a
+ new implementation based on the AT&amp;T System V program
+ <STRONG>tput</STRONG>. Like the AT&amp;T program, Bostic's version accepted
+ some parameters named for <EM>terminfo</EM> <EM>capabilities</EM> (<STRONG>clear</STRONG>,
+ <STRONG>init</STRONG>, <STRONG>longname</STRONG> and <STRONG>reset</STRONG>). However (because he had only
+ termcap available), it accepted <EM>termcap</EM> <EM>names</EM> for other
+ capabilities. Also, Bostic's BSD <STRONG>tput</STRONG> did not modify the
terminal I/O modes as the earlier BSD <STRONG>tset</STRONG> had done.
- At the same time, Bostic added a shell script named
+ At the same time, Bostic added a shell script named
"clear", which used <STRONG>tput</STRONG> to clear the screen.
- Both of these appeared in 4.4BSD, becoming the "modern"
+ Both of these appeared in 4.4BSD, becoming the "modern"
BSD implementation of <STRONG>tput</STRONG>.
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-PORTABILITY">PORTABILITY</a></H2><PRE>
- This implementation of <STRONG>tput</STRONG> differs from AT&amp;T <STRONG>tput</STRONG> in two
+ This implementation of <STRONG>tput</STRONG> differs from AT&amp;T <STRONG>tput</STRONG> in two
important areas:
<STRONG>o</STRONG> <STRONG>tput</STRONG> <EM>capname</EM> writes to the standard output. That need
- not be a regular terminal. However, the subcommands
- which manipulate terminal modes may not use the stan-
+ not be a regular terminal. However, the subcommands
+ which manipulate terminal modes may not use the stan-
dard output.
- The AT&amp;T implementation's <STRONG>init</STRONG> and <STRONG>reset</STRONG> commands use
+ The AT&amp;T implementation's <STRONG>init</STRONG> and <STRONG>reset</STRONG> commands use
the BSD (4.1c) <STRONG>tset</STRONG> source, which manipulates terminal
- modes. It successively tries standard output, stan-
- dard error, standard input before falling back to
+ modes. It successively tries standard output, stan-
+ dard error, standard input before falling back to
"/dev/tty" and finally just assumes a 1200Bd terminal.
When updating terminal modes, it ignores errors.
- Until changes made after ncurses 6.0, <STRONG>tput</STRONG> did not
+ Until changes made after ncurses 6.0, <STRONG>tput</STRONG> did not
modify terminal modes. <STRONG>tput</STRONG> now uses a similar
- scheme, using functions shared with <STRONG>tset</STRONG> (and ulti-
- mately based on the 4.4BSD <STRONG>tset</STRONG>). If it is not able
- to open a terminal, e.g., when running in <STRONG>cron</STRONG>, <STRONG>tput</STRONG>
+ scheme, using functions shared with <STRONG>tset</STRONG> (and ulti-
+ mately based on the 4.4BSD <STRONG>tset</STRONG>). If it is not able
+ to open a terminal, e.g., when running in <STRONG>cron</STRONG>, <STRONG>tput</STRONG>
will return an error.
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> AT&amp;T <STRONG>tput</STRONG> guesses the type of its <EM>capname</EM> operands by
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> AT&amp;T <STRONG>tput</STRONG> guesses the type of its <EM>capname</EM> operands by
seeing if all of the characters are numeric, or not.
Most implementations which provide support for <EM>capname</EM>
- operands use the <EM>tparm</EM> function to expand parameters
+ operands use the <EM>tparm</EM> function to expand parameters
in it. That function expects a mixture of numeric and
- string parameters, requiring <STRONG>tput</STRONG> to know which type
+ string parameters, requiring <STRONG>tput</STRONG> to know which type
to use.
- This implementation uses a table to determine the
+ This implementation uses a table to determine the
parameter types for the standard <EM>capname</EM> operands, and
- an internal library function to analyze nonstandard
+ an internal library function to analyze nonstandard
<EM>capname</EM> operands.
- The <STRONG>longname</STRONG> and <STRONG>-S</STRONG> options, and the parameter-substitu-
- tion features used in the <STRONG>cup</STRONG> example, were not supported
- in BSD curses before 4.3reno (1989) or in AT&amp;T/USL curses
+ The <STRONG>longname</STRONG> and <STRONG>-S</STRONG> options, and the parameter-substitu-
+ tion features used in the <STRONG>cup</STRONG> example, were not supported
+ in BSD curses before 4.3reno (1989) or in AT&amp;T/USL curses
before SVr4 (1988).
- IEEE Std 1003.1/The Open Group Base Specifications Issue
- 7 (POSIX.1-2008) documents only the operands for <STRONG>clear</STRONG>,
- <STRONG>init</STRONG> and <STRONG>reset</STRONG>. There are a few interesting observations
+ IEEE Std 1003.1/The Open Group Base Specifications Issue
+ 7 (POSIX.1-2008) documents only the operands for <STRONG>clear</STRONG>,
+ <STRONG>init</STRONG> and <STRONG>reset</STRONG>. There are a few interesting observations
to make regarding that:
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> In this implementation, <STRONG>clear</STRONG> is part of the <EM>capname</EM>
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> In this implementation, <STRONG>clear</STRONG> is part of the <EM>capname</EM>
support. The others (<STRONG>init</STRONG> and <STRONG>longname</STRONG>) do not corre-
spond to terminal capabilities.
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> Other implementations of <STRONG>tput</STRONG> on SVr4-based systems
- such as Solaris, IRIX64 and HPUX as well as others
- such as AIX and Tru64 provide support for <EM>capname</EM> op-
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> Other implementations of <STRONG>tput</STRONG> on SVr4-based systems
+ such as Solaris, IRIX64 and HPUX as well as others
+ such as AIX and Tru64 provide support for <EM>capname</EM> op-
erands.
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> A few platforms such as FreeBSD recognize termcap
- names rather than terminfo capability names in their
- respective <STRONG>tput</STRONG> commands. Since 2010, NetBSD's <STRONG>tput</STRONG>
- uses terminfo names. Before that, it (like FreeBSD)
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> A few platforms such as FreeBSD recognize termcap
+ names rather than terminfo capability names in their
+ respective <STRONG>tput</STRONG> commands. Since 2010, NetBSD's <STRONG>tput</STRONG>
+ uses terminfo names. Before that, it (like FreeBSD)
recognized termcap names.
- Because (apparently) <EM>all</EM> of the certified Unix systems
- support the full set of capability names, the reasoning
+ Because (apparently) <EM>all</EM> of the certified Unix systems
+ support the full set of capability names, the reasoning
for documenting only a few may not be apparent.
<STRONG>o</STRONG> X/Open Curses Issue 7 documents <STRONG>tput</STRONG> differently, with
- <EM>capname</EM> and the other features used in this implemen-
+ <EM>capname</EM> and the other features used in this implemen-
tation.
- <STRONG>o</STRONG> That is, there are two standards for <STRONG>tput</STRONG>: POSIX (a
- subset) and X/Open Curses (the full implementation).
- POSIX documents a subset to avoid the complication of
- including X/Open Curses and the terminal capabilities
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> That is, there are two standards for <STRONG>tput</STRONG>: POSIX (a
+ subset) and X/Open Curses (the full implementation).
+ POSIX documents a subset to avoid the complication of
+ including X/Open Curses and the terminal capabilities
database.
<STRONG>o</STRONG> While it is certainly possible to write a <STRONG>tput</STRONG> program
without using curses, none of the systems which have a
- curses implementation provide a <STRONG>tput</STRONG> utility which
+ curses implementation provide a <STRONG>tput</STRONG> utility which
does not provide the <EM>capname</EM> feature.
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-SEE-ALSO">SEE ALSO</a></H2><PRE>
- <STRONG><A HREF="clear.1.html">clear(1)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG>stty(1)</STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="tabs.1.html">tabs(1)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="tset.1.html">tset(1)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="terminfo.5.html">terminfo(5)</A></STRONG>,
+ <STRONG><A HREF="clear.1.html">clear(1)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG>stty(1)</STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="tabs.1.html">tabs(1)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="tset.1.html">tset(1)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="terminfo.5.html">terminfo(5)</A></STRONG>,
<STRONG><A HREF="curs_termcap.3x.html">curs_termcap(3x)</A></STRONG>.
- This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20161231).
+ This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20170107).
Index: doc/html/man/tset.1.html
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/doc/html/man/tset.1.html 2016-12-31 21:41:38.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/doc/html/man/tset.1.html 2017-01-07 23:09:13.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
<!--
****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2013,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
* sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
* authorization. *
****************************************************************************
- * @Id: tset.1,v 1.43 2016/08/06 23:16:39 tom Exp @
+ * @Id: tset.1,v 1.47 2017/01/07 22:59:51 tom Exp @
-->
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
<HTML>
@@ -99,35 +99,66 @@
("?"), the user is prompted for confirmation of the termi-
nal type. An empty response confirms the type, or,
another type can be entered to specify a new type. Once
- the terminal type has been determined, the terminfo entry
- for the terminal is retrieved. If no terminfo entry is
- found for the type, the user is prompted for another ter-
- minal type.
-
- Once the terminfo entry is retrieved, the window size,
- backspace, interrupt and line kill characters (among many
- other things) are set and the terminal and tab initializa-
- tion strings are sent to the standard error output.
- Finally, if the erase, interrupt and line kill characters
- have changed, or are not set to their default values,
- their values are displayed to the standard error output.
+ the terminal type has been determined, the terminal
+ description for the terminal is retrieved. If no terminal
+ description is found for the type, the user is prompted
+ for another terminal type.
+
+ Once the terminal description is retrieved,
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> if the "<STRONG>-w</STRONG>" option is enabled, <STRONG>tset</STRONG> may update the
+ terminal's window size.
+
+ If the window size cannot be obtained from the operat-
+ ing system, but the terminal description (or environ-
+ ment, e.g., <STRONG>LINES</STRONG> and <STRONG>COLUMNS</STRONG> variables specify this),
+ use this to set the operating system's notion of the
+ window size.
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> if the "<STRONG>-c</STRONG>" option is enabled, the backspace, inter-
+ rupt and line kill characters (among many other
+ things) are set
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> unless the "<STRONG>-I</STRONG>" option is enabled, the terminal and
+ tab <EM>initialization</EM> strings are sent to the standard
+ error output, and <STRONG>tset</STRONG> waits one second (in case a
+ hardware reset was issued).
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> Finally, if the erase, interrupt and line kill charac-
+ ters have changed, or are not set to their default
+ values, their values are displayed to the standard
+ error output.
</PRE><H3><a name="h3-reset---reinitialization">reset - reinitialization</a></H3><PRE>
- When invoked as <STRONG>reset</STRONG>, <STRONG>tset</STRONG> sets cooked and echo modes,
- turns off cbreak and raw modes, turns on newline transla-
- tion and resets any unset special characters to their
- default values before doing the terminal initialization
- described above. This is useful after a program dies
- leaving a terminal in an abnormal state. Note, you may
- have to type
-
- <EM>&lt;LF&gt;</EM><STRONG>reset</STRONG><EM>&lt;LF&gt;</EM>
-
- (the line-feed character is normally control-J) to get the
- terminal to work, as carriage-return may no longer work in
- the abnormal state. Also, the terminal will often not
- echo the command.
+ When invoked as <STRONG>reset</STRONG>, <STRONG>tset</STRONG> sets the terminal modes to
+ "sane" values:
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> sets cooked and echo modes,
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> turns off cbreak and raw modes,
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> turns on newline translation and
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> resets any unset special characters to their default
+ values
+
+ before doing the terminal initialization described above.
+ Also, rather than using the terminal <EM>initialization</EM>
+ strings, it uses the terminal <EM>reset</EM> strings.
+
+ The <STRONG>reset</STRONG> command is useful after a program dies leaving a
+ terminal in an abnormal state:
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> you may have to type
+
+ <EM>&lt;LF&gt;</EM><STRONG>reset</STRONG><EM>&lt;LF&gt;</EM>
+
+ (the line-feed character is normally control-J) to get
+ the terminal to work, as carriage-return may no longer
+ work in the abnormal state.
+
+ <STRONG>o</STRONG> Also, the terminal will often not echo the command.
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-OPTIONS">OPTIONS</a></H2><PRE>
@@ -144,51 +175,51 @@
<STRONG>-k</STRONG> Set the line kill character to <EM>ch</EM>.
- <STRONG>-m</STRONG> Specify a mapping from a port type to a terminal.
+ <STRONG>-m</STRONG> Specify a mapping from a port type to a terminal.
See the section <STRONG>TERMINAL</STRONG> <STRONG>TYPE</STRONG> <STRONG>MAPPING</STRONG> for more infor-
mation.
- <STRONG>-Q</STRONG> Do not display any values for the erase, interrupt
+ <STRONG>-Q</STRONG> Do not display any values for the erase, interrupt
and line kill characters. Normally <STRONG>tset</STRONG> displays the
- values for control characters which differ from the
+ values for control characters which differ from the
system's default values.
- <STRONG>-q</STRONG> The terminal type is displayed to the standard out-
- put, and the terminal is not initialized in any way.
+ <STRONG>-q</STRONG> The terminal type is displayed to the standard out-
+ put, and the terminal is not initialized in any way.
The option "-" by itself is equivalent but archaic.
<STRONG>-r</STRONG> Print the terminal type to the standard error output.
- <STRONG>-s</STRONG> Print the sequence of shell commands to initialize
+ <STRONG>-s</STRONG> Print the sequence of shell commands to initialize
the environment variable <STRONG>TERM</STRONG> to the standard output.
See the section <STRONG>SETTING</STRONG> <STRONG>THE</STRONG> <STRONG>ENVIRONMENT</STRONG> for details.
<STRONG>-V</STRONG> reports the version of ncurses which was used in this
program, and exits.
- <STRONG>-w</STRONG> Resize the window to match the size deduced via
- <STRONG>setupterm</STRONG>. Normally this has no effect, unless
+ <STRONG>-w</STRONG> Resize the window to match the size deduced via
+ <STRONG><A HREF="curs_terminfo.3x.html">setupterm(3x)</A></STRONG>. Normally this has no effect, unless
<STRONG>setupterm</STRONG> is not able to detect the window size.
The arguments for the <STRONG>-e</STRONG>, <STRONG>-i</STRONG>, and <STRONG>-k</STRONG> options may either be
- entered as actual characters or by using the "hat" nota-
+ entered as actual characters or by using the "hat" nota-
tion, i.e., control-h may be specified as "^H" or "^h".
If neither <STRONG>-c</STRONG> or <STRONG>-w</STRONG> is given, both options are assumed.
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-SETTING-THE-ENVIRONMENT">SETTING THE ENVIRONMENT</a></H2><PRE>
- It is often desirable to enter the terminal type and
- information about the terminal's capabilities into the
+ It is often desirable to enter the terminal type and
+ information about the terminal's capabilities into the
shell's environment. This is done using the <STRONG>-s</STRONG> option.
When the <STRONG>-s</STRONG> option is specified, the commands to enter the
- information into the shell's environment are written to
- the standard output. If the <STRONG>SHELL</STRONG> environmental variable
- ends in "csh", the commands are for <STRONG>csh</STRONG>, otherwise, they
- are for <STRONG>sh</STRONG>. Note, the <STRONG>csh</STRONG> commands set and unset the
- shell variable <STRONG>noglob</STRONG>, leaving it unset. The following
- line in the <STRONG>.login</STRONG> or <STRONG>.profile</STRONG> files will initialize the
+ information into the shell's environment are written to
+ the standard output. If the <STRONG>SHELL</STRONG> environmental variable
+ ends in "csh", the commands are for <STRONG>csh</STRONG>, otherwise, they
+ are for <STRONG>sh</STRONG>. Note, the <STRONG>csh</STRONG> commands set and unset the
+ shell variable <STRONG>noglob</STRONG>, leaving it unset. The following
+ line in the <STRONG>.login</STRONG> or <STRONG>.profile</STRONG> files will initialize the
environment correctly:
eval `tset -s options ... `
@@ -197,74 +228,75 @@
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-TERMINAL-TYPE-MAPPING">TERMINAL TYPE MAPPING</a></H2><PRE>
When the terminal is not hardwired into the system (or the
current system information is incorrect) the terminal type
- derived from the <EM>/etc/ttys</EM> file or the <STRONG>TERM</STRONG> environmental
- variable is often something generic like <STRONG>network</STRONG>, <STRONG>dialup</STRONG>,
- or <STRONG>unknown</STRONG>. When <STRONG>tset</STRONG> is used in a startup script it is
- often desirable to provide information about the type of
+ derived from the <EM>/etc/ttys</EM> file or the <STRONG>TERM</STRONG> environmental
+ variable is often something generic like <STRONG>network</STRONG>, <STRONG>dialup</STRONG>,
+ or <STRONG>unknown</STRONG>. When <STRONG>tset</STRONG> is used in a startup script it is
+ often desirable to provide information about the type of
terminal used on such ports.
- The <STRONG>-m</STRONG> options maps from some set of conditions to a ter-
- minal type, that is, to tell <STRONG>tset</STRONG> "If I'm on this port at
- a particular speed, guess that I'm on that kind of termi-
+ The <STRONG>-m</STRONG> options maps from some set of conditions to a ter-
+ minal type, that is, to tell <STRONG>tset</STRONG> "If I'm on this port at
+ a particular speed, guess that I'm on that kind of termi-
nal".
The argument to the <STRONG>-m</STRONG> option consists of an optional port
type, an optional operator, an optional baud rate specifi-
- cation, an optional colon (":") character and a terminal
- type. The port type is a string (delimited by either the
+ cation, an optional colon (":") character and a terminal
+ type. The port type is a string (delimited by either the
operator or the colon character). The operator may be any
- combination of "&gt;", "&lt;", "@", and "!"; "&gt;" means greater
- than, "&lt;" means less than, "@" means equal to and "!"
+ combination of "&gt;", "&lt;", "@", and "!"; "&gt;" means greater
+ than, "&lt;" means less than, "@" means equal to and "!"
inverts the sense of the test. The baud rate is specified
as a number and is compared with the speed of the standard
- error output (which should be the control terminal). The
+ error output (which should be the control terminal). The
terminal type is a string.
If the terminal type is not specified on the command line,
- the <STRONG>-m</STRONG> mappings are applied to the terminal type. If the
- port type and baud rate match the mapping, the terminal
- type specified in the mapping replaces the current type.
- If more than one mapping is specified, the first applica-
+ the <STRONG>-m</STRONG> mappings are applied to the terminal type. If the
+ port type and baud rate match the mapping, the terminal
+ type specified in the mapping replaces the current type.
+ If more than one mapping is specified, the first applica-
ble mapping is used.
- For example, consider the following mapping:
+ For example, consider the following mapping:
<STRONG>dialup&gt;9600:vt100</STRONG>. The port type is dialup , the operator
- is &gt;, the baud rate specification is 9600, and the termi-
+ is &gt;, the baud rate specification is 9600, and the termi-
nal type is vt100. The result of this mapping is to spec-
ify that if the terminal type is <STRONG>dialup</STRONG>, and the baud rate
- is greater than 9600 baud, a terminal type of <STRONG>vt100</STRONG> will
+ is greater than 9600 baud, a terminal type of <STRONG>vt100</STRONG> will
be used.
If no baud rate is specified, the terminal type will match
any baud rate. If no port type is specified, the terminal
- type will match any port type. For example, <STRONG>-m</STRONG>
+ type will match any port type. For example, <STRONG>-m</STRONG>
<STRONG>dialup:vt100</STRONG> <STRONG>-m</STRONG> <STRONG>:?xterm</STRONG> will cause any dialup port,
regardless of baud rate, to match the terminal type vt100,
- and any non-dialup port type to match the terminal type
- ?xterm. Note, because of the leading question mark, the
- user will be queried on a default port as to whether they
+ and any non-dialup port type to match the terminal type
+ ?xterm. Note, because of the leading question mark, the
+ user will be queried on a default port as to whether they
are actually using an xterm terminal.
- No whitespace characters are permitted in the <STRONG>-m</STRONG> option
- argument. Also, to avoid problems with meta-characters,
- it is suggested that the entire <STRONG>-m</STRONG> option argument be
- placed within single quote characters, and that <STRONG>csh</STRONG> users
- insert a backslash character ("\") before any exclamation
+ No whitespace characters are permitted in the <STRONG>-m</STRONG> option
+ argument. Also, to avoid problems with meta-characters,
+ it is suggested that the entire <STRONG>-m</STRONG> option argument be
+ placed within single quote characters, and that <STRONG>csh</STRONG> users
+ insert a backslash character ("\") before any exclamation
marks ("!").
</PRE><H2><a name="h2-HISTORY">HISTORY</a></H2><PRE>
- A <STRONG>reset</STRONG> command appeared in 2BSD (1979), written by Kurt
+ A <STRONG>reset</STRONG> command appeared in 2BSD (1979), written by Kurt
Shoens.
- A separate <STRONG>tset</STRONG> command was provided in 2BSD by Eric All-
- man. While the oldest published source (from 1979) pro-
- vides both programs, Allman's comments in the 2BSD source
+ A separate <STRONG>tset</STRONG> command was provided in 2BSD by Eric All-
+ man. While the oldest published source (from 1979) pro-
+ vides both programs, Allman's comments in the 2BSD source
code indicate that he began work in October 1977, continu-
ing development over the next few years.
- In 1980, Eric Allman modified <STRONG>tset</STRONG> to provide a "reset"
- feature when the program was invoked as <STRONG>reset</STRONG>.
+ In September 1980, Eric Allman modified <STRONG>tset</STRONG> to provide a
+ "reset" feature when the program was invoked as <STRONG>reset</STRONG>.
+ This version appeared in 4.1cBSD, late in 1982.
The <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> implementation was lightly adapted from the
4.4BSD sources for a terminfo environment by Eric S. Ray-
@@ -387,7 +419,7 @@
<STRONG>csh(1)</STRONG>, <STRONG>sh(1)</STRONG>, <STRONG>stty(1)</STRONG>, <STRONG><A HREF="curs_terminfo.3x.html">curs_terminfo(3x)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG>tty(4)</STRONG>,
<STRONG><A HREF="terminfo.5.html">terminfo(5)</A></STRONG>, <STRONG>ttys(5)</STRONG>, <STRONG>environ(7)</STRONG>
- This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20161231).
+ This describes <STRONG>ncurses</STRONG> version 6.0 (patch 20170107).
Index: man/curs_add_wch.3x
Prereq: 1.16
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/curs_add_wch.3x 2015-07-20 23:44:56.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/curs_add_wch.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 2001-2012,2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 2001-2015,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: curs_add_wch.3x,v 1.16 2015/07/20 23:44:56 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_add_wch.3x,v 1.17 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.TH curs_add_wch 3X ""
.de bP
.IP \(bu 4
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@
function is functionally equivalent to a call to
\fBadd_wch\fP
followed by a call to
-\fBrefresh\fP.
+\fBrefresh\fP(3X).
Similarly, the
\fBwecho_wchar\fP
is functionally equivalent to a call to
Index: man/curs_addch.3x
Prereq: 1.37
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/curs_addch.3x 2015-09-05 21:13:25.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/curs_addch.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
'\" t
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2014,2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: curs_addch.3x,v 1.37 2015/09/05 21:13:25 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_addch.3x,v 1.38 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.TH curs_addch 3X ""
.de bP
.IP \(bu 4
@@ -95,13 +95,13 @@
Video attributes can be combined with a character argument passed to
\fBaddch\fR or related functions by logical-ORing them into the character.
(Thus, text, including attributes, can be copied from one place to another
-using \fBinch\fR and \fBaddch\fR.) See the \fBcurs_attr\fR(3X) page for
+using \fBinch\fR(3X) and \fBaddch\fR.) See the \fBcurs_attr\fR(3X) page for
values of predefined video attribute constants that can be usefully OR'ed
into characters.
.SS Echoing characters
.PP
The \fBechochar\fR and \fBwechochar\fR routines are equivalent to a call to
-\fBaddch\fR followed by a call to \fBrefresh\fR, or a call to \fBwaddch\fR
+\fBaddch\fR followed by a call to \fBrefresh\fR(3X), or a call to \fBwaddch\fR
followed by a call to \fBwrefresh\fR. The knowledge that only a single
character is being output is used and, for non-control characters, a
considerable performance gain may be seen by using these routines instead of
Index: man/curs_attr.3x
Prereq: 1.48
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/curs_attr.3x 2016-10-15 17:09:05.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/curs_attr.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
'\" t
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: curs_attr.3x,v 1.48 2016/10/15 17:09:05 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_attr.3x,v 1.49 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.TH curs_attr 3X ""
.de bP
.IP \(bu 4
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@
.PP
In these functions,
the color \fIpair\fP argument is a color-pair index
-(as in the first argument of \fIinit_pair\fR, see \fBcurs_color\fR(3X)).
+(as in the first argument of \fBinit_pair\fR, see \fBcurs_color\fR(3X)).
The \fBopts\fR argument is not
presently used, but is reserved for the future (leave it \fBNULL\fR).
.\" ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Index: man/curs_color.3x
Prereq: 1.45
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/curs_color.3x 2016-10-15 17:10:19.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/curs_color.3x 2017-01-07 19:57:48.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: curs_color.3x,v 1.45 2016/10/15 17:10:19 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_color.3x,v 1.46 2017/01/07 19:57:48 tom Exp $
.TH curs_color 3X ""
.ie \n(.g .ds `` \(lq
.el .ds `` ``
@@ -323,7 +323,7 @@
returns an error if the color table cannot be allocated.
.RE
.SH NOTES
-In the \fIncurses\fR implementation, there is a separate color activation flag,
+In the \fBncurses\fR implementation, there is a separate color activation flag,
color palette, color pairs table, and associated COLORS and COLOR_PAIRS counts
for each screen; the \fBstart_color\fR function only affects the current
screen.
Index: man/curs_get_wstr.3x
Prereq: 1.9
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/curs_get_wstr.3x 2012-11-03 23:03:59.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/curs_get_wstr.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 2002-2010,2012 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 2002-2012,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: curs_get_wstr.3x,v 1.9 2012/11/03 23:03:59 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_get_wstr.3x,v 1.10 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.TH curs_get_wstr 3X ""
.na
.hy 0
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@
\fBget_wstr\fR
is as though a series of calls
to
-\fBget_wch\fR
+\fBget_wch\fR(3X)
were made, until a newline, other end-of-line, or end-of-file condition is processed.
An end-of-file condition is represented by \fBWEOF\fR, as defined in \fB<wchar.h>\fR.
The newline and end-of-line conditions are represented by the \fB\\n\fR \fBwchar_t\fR value.
Index: man/curs_getstr.3x
Prereq: 1.19
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/curs_getstr.3x 2010-12-04 18:36:44.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/curs_getstr.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2005,2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2010,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: curs_getstr.3x,v 1.19 2010/12/04 18:36:44 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_getstr.3x,v 1.20 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.TH curs_getstr 3X ""
.na
.hy 0
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@
They read single-byte characters only.
The standard does not define any error conditions.
This implementation returns ERR if the window pointer is null,
-or if the lower-level \fBwgetch\fR call returns an ERR.
+or if the lower-level \fBwgetch\fR(3X) call returns an ERR.
.PP
SVr3 and early SVr4 curses implementations did not reject function keys;
the SVr4.0 documentation claimed that "special keys" (such as function
Index: man/curs_initscr.3x
Prereq: 1.25
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/curs_initscr.3x 2016-10-15 17:02:31.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/curs_initscr.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: curs_initscr.3x,v 1.25 2016/10/15 17:02:31 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_initscr.3x,v 1.26 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.TH curs_initscr 3X ""
.de bP
.IP \(bu 4
@@ -66,14 +66,14 @@
\fBinitscr\fR is normally the first \fBcurses\fR routine to call when
initializing a program.
A few special routines sometimes need to be called before it;
-these are \fBslk_init\fR, \fBfilter\fR, \fBripoffline\fR,
+these are \fBslk_init\fR(3X), \fBfilter\fR, \fBripoffline\fR,
\fBuse_env\fR.
For multiple-terminal applications,
\fBnewterm\fR may be called before \fBinitscr\fR.
.PP
The initscr code determines the terminal type and initializes all \fBcurses\fR
data structures.
-\fBinitscr\fR also causes the first call to \fBrefresh\fR to clear the screen.
+\fBinitscr\fR also causes the first call to \fBrefresh\fR(3X) to clear the screen.
If errors occur, \fBinitscr\fR writes an appropriate error
message to standard error and exits;
otherwise, a pointer is returned to \fBstdscr\fR.
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@
resets the terminal into
the proper non-visual mode.
.PP
-Calling \fBrefresh\fR or \fBdoupdate\fR after a
+Calling \fBrefresh\fR(3X) or \fBdoupdate\fR after a
temporary escape causes the program to resume visual mode.
.SS isendwin
.PP
Index: man/curs_inopts.3x
Prereq: 1.23
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/curs_inopts.3x 2016-10-22 19:54:35.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/curs_inopts.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: curs_inopts.3x,v 1.23 2016/10/22 19:54:35 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_inopts.3x,v 1.24 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.TH curs_inopts 3X ""
.ie \n(.g .ds `` \(lq
.el .ds `` ``
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@
.SS echo/noecho
.PP
The \fBecho\fR and \fBnoecho\fR routines control whether characters typed by
-the user are echoed by \fBgetch\fR as they are typed.
+the user are echoed by \fBgetch\fR(3X) as they are typed.
Echoing by the tty
driver is always disabled, but initially \fBgetch\fR is in echo mode, so
characters typed are echoed.
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@
The \fBkeypad\fR option enables the keypad of the user's terminal.
If
enabled (\fIbf\fR is \fBTRUE\fR), the user can press a function key
-(such as an arrow key) and \fBwgetch\fR returns a single value
+(such as an arrow key) and \fBwgetch\fR(3X) returns a single value
representing the function key, as in \fBKEY_LEFT\fR.
If disabled
(\fIbf\fR is \fBFALSE\fR), \fBcurses\fR does not treat function keys
@@ -171,7 +171,7 @@
itself.
If the keypad in the terminal can be turned on (made to
transmit) and off (made to work locally), turning on this option
-causes the terminal keypad to be turned on when \fBwgetch\fR is
+causes the terminal keypad to be turned on when \fBwgetch\fR(3X) is
called.
The default value for keypad is \fBFALSE\fP.
.\"
@@ -200,7 +200,7 @@
If disabled
(\fIbf\fR is \fBFALSE\fR), \fBgetch\fR waits until a key is pressed.
.PP
-While interpreting an input escape sequence, \fBwgetch\fR sets a timer
+While interpreting an input escape sequence, \fBwgetch\fR(3X) sets a timer
while waiting for the next character.
If \fBnotimeout(\fR\fIwin\fR,
\fBTRUE\fR) is called, then \fBwgetch\fR does not set a timer.
@@ -255,7 +255,7 @@
by looking for typeahead periodically while updating the screen.
If input is found, and it is coming from a tty,
the current update is postponed until
-\fBrefresh\fR or \fBdoupdate\fR is called again.
+\fBrefresh\fR(3X) or \fBdoupdate\fR is called again.
This allows faster response to commands typed in advance.
Normally, the input FILE
pointer passed to \fBnewterm\fR, or \fBstdin\fR in the case that
Index: man/curs_kernel.3x
Prereq: 1.21
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/curs_kernel.3x 2016-10-15 16:42:55.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/curs_kernel.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: curs_kernel.3x,v 1.21 2016/10/15 16:42:55 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_kernel.3x,v 1.22 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.de bP
.IP \(bu 4
..
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@
.PP
The \fBreset_prog_mode\fR and \fBreset_shell_mode\fR routines restore
the terminal to "program" (in \fBcurses\fR) or "shell" (out of
-\fBcurses\fR) state. These are done automatically by \fBendwin\fR
+\fBcurses\fR) state. These are done automatically by \fBendwin\fR(3X)
and, after an \fBendwin\fR, by \fBdoupdate\fR, so they normally are
not called.
.SS resetty, savetty
Index: man/curs_memleaks.3x
Prereq: 1.3
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/curs_memleaks.3x 2010-12-04 18:40:45.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/curs_memleaks.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 2008,2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 2008-2010,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: curs_memleaks.3x,v 1.3 2010/12/04 18:40:45 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_memleaks.3x,v 1.4 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.TH curs_memleaks 3X ""
.na
.hy 0
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
.PP
Any implementation of curses must not free the memory associated with
a screen, since (even after calling \fBendwin\fP), it must be available
-for use in the next call to \fBrefresh\fP.
+for use in the next call to \fBrefresh\fP(3X).
There are also chunks of memory held for performance reasons.
That makes it hard to analyze curses applications for memory leaks.
To work around this, one can build a debugging version of the ncurses
Index: man/curs_mouse.3x
Prereq: 1.42
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/curs_mouse.3x 2015-07-21 09:27:39.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/curs_mouse.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
'\" t
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2014,2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: curs_mouse.3x,v 1.42 2015/07/21 09:27:39 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_mouse.3x,v 1.43 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.de bP
.IP \(bu 4
..
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@
These functions provide an interface to mouse events from
\fBncurses\fR(3X).
Mouse events are represented by \fBKEY_MOUSE\fR
-pseudo-key values in the \fBwgetch\fR input stream.
+pseudo-key values in the \fBwgetch\fR(3X) input stream.
.SS mousemask
.PP
To make mouse events visible, use the \fBmousemask\fR function.
@@ -177,7 +177,7 @@
The resulting stdscr-relative coordinates are not always identical
to window-relative coordinates due to the mechanism to reserve lines on top
or bottom of the screen for other purposes
-(see the \fBripoffline\fP and \fBslk_init\fR calls, for example).
+(see the \fBripoffline\fP and \fBslk_init\fR(3X) calls, for example).
.bP
If the parameter \fBto_screen\fR is \fBTRUE\fR, the pointers
\fBpY, pX\fR must reference the coordinates of a location
Index: man/curs_move.3x
Prereq: 1.14
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/curs_move.3x 2010-12-04 18:40:45.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/curs_move.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2006,2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2010,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: curs_move.3x,v 1.14 2010/12/04 18:40:45 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_move.3x,v 1.15 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.TH curs_move 3X ""
.na
.hy 0
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
.SH DESCRIPTION
These routines move the cursor associated with the window to line \fIy\fR and
column \fIx\fR. This routine does not move the physical cursor of the terminal
-until \fBrefresh\fR is called. The position specified is relative to the upper
+until \fBrefresh\fR(3X) is called. The position specified is relative to the upper
left-hand corner of the window, which is (0,0).
.SH RETURN VALUE
These routines return \fBERR\fR upon failure and OK (SVr4
Index: man/curs_outopts.3x
Prereq: 1.27
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/curs_outopts.3x 2016-10-15 17:02:31.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/curs_outopts.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: curs_outopts.3x,v 1.27 2016/10/15 17:02:31 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_outopts.3x,v 1.28 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.TH curs_outopts 3X ""
.na
.hy 0
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@
These routines set options that change the style of output within
\fBcurses\fR.
All options are initially \fBFALSE\fR, unless otherwise stated.
-It is not necessary to turn these options off before calling \fBendwin\fR.
+It is not necessary to turn these options off before calling \fBendwin\fR(3X).
.SS clearok
.PP
If \fBclearok\fR is called with \fBTRUE\fR as argument, the next
Index: man/curs_pad.3x
Prereq: 1.18
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/curs_pad.3x 2015-07-21 08:58:44.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/curs_pad.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2010,2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: curs_pad.3x,v 1.18 2015/07/21 08:58:44 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_pad.3x,v 1.19 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.TH curs_pad 3X ""
.na
.hy 0
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@
.SS pechochar
.PP
The \fBpechochar\fR routine is functionally equivalent to a call to \fBaddch\fR
-followed by a call to \fBrefresh\fR, a call to \fBwaddch\fR followed by a call
+followed by a call to \fBrefresh\fR(3X), a call to \fBwaddch\fR followed by a call
to \fBwrefresh\fR, or a call to \fBwaddch\fR followed by a call to
\fBprefresh\fR.
The knowledge that only a single character is being output is
Index: man/curs_print.3x
Prereq: 1.10
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/curs_print.3x 2010-12-04 18:40:45.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/curs_print.3x 2017-01-07 17:33:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2006,2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2010,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: curs_print.3x,v 1.10 2010/12/04 18:40:45 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_print.3x,v 1.11 2017/01/07 17:33:15 tom Exp $
.TH curs_print 3X ""
.SH NAME
\fBmcprint\fR \- ship binary data to printer
@@ -65,4 +65,4 @@
Padding in the \fBmc5p\fR, \fBmc4\fR and \fBmc5\fR capabilities will not be
interpreted.
.SH SEE ALSO
-\fBcurses\fR(3X)\fR
+\fBcurses\fR(3X)
Index: man/curs_printw.3x
Prereq: 1.20
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/curs_printw.3x 2010-12-04 18:40:45.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/curs_printw.3x 2017-01-07 17:33:45.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2006,2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2010,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: curs_printw.3x,v 1.20 2010/12/04 18:40:45 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_printw.3x,v 1.21 2017/01/07 17:33:45 tom Exp $
.TH curs_printw 3X ""
.na
.hy 0
@@ -89,4 +89,4 @@
This implementation uses \fB<stdarg.h>\fR for both, because that header
is included in \fB<curses.h\fR>.
.SH SEE ALSO
-\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBprintf\fR(3), \fBvprintf(3)\fR
+\fBcurses\fR(3X), \fBprintf\fR(3), \fBvprintf\fR(3).
Index: man/curs_scr_dump.3x
Prereq: 1.9
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/curs_scr_dump.3x 2010-12-04 18:40:45.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/curs_scr_dump.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2006,2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2010,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: curs_scr_dump.3x,v 1.9 2010/12/04 18:40:45 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_scr_dump.3x,v 1.10 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.TH curs_scr_dump 3X ""
.na
.hy 0
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@
than clearing the screen and starting from scratch. \fBscr_init\fR is used
after \fBinitscr\fR or a \fBsystem\fR call to share
the screen with another process which has done a \fBscr_dump\fR after its
-\fBendwin\fR call. The data is declared invalid if the terminfo capabilities
+\fBendwin\fR(3X) call. The data is declared invalid if the terminfo capabilities
\fBrmcup\fR and \fBnrrmc\fR exist; also if the terminal has been written to
since the preceding \fBscr_dump\fR call.
.PP
Index: man/curs_termcap.3x
Prereq: 1.32
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/curs_termcap.3x 2016-03-19 22:52:25.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/curs_termcap.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: curs_termcap.3x,v 1.32 2016/03/19 22:52:25 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_termcap.3x,v 1.33 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.TH curs_termcap 3X ""
.de bP
.IP \(bu 4
@@ -165,7 +165,7 @@
In that case, the first parameter is merely a placeholder.
.bP
Normally the ncurses library is compiled with terminfo support.
-In that case, \fBtgoto\fP uses \fBtparm\fP (a more capable formatter).
+In that case, \fBtgoto\fP uses \fBtparm\fP(3X) (a more capable formatter).
.PP
The \fBtputs\fR routine is described on the \fBcurs_terminfo\fR(3X) manual
page. It can retrieve capabilities by either termcap or terminfo name.
Index: man/curs_trace.3x
Prereq: 1.16
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/curs_trace.3x 2016-12-03 23:53:23.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/curs_trace.3x 2017-01-07 18:45:42.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 2000-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 2000-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: curs_trace.3x,v 1.16 2016/12/03 23:53:23 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_trace.3x,v 1.17 2017/01/07 18:45:42 tom Exp $
.de bP
.IP \(bu 4
..
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@
trace user and system times of updates.
.TP 5
.B TRACE_TPUTS
-trace \fBtputs\fP calls.
+trace \fBtputs\fP(3X) calls.
.TP 5
.B TRACE_UPDATE
trace update actions, old & new screens.
Index: man/curs_util.3x
Prereq: 1.43
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/curs_util.3x 2015-06-06 23:36:27.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/curs_util.3x 2017-01-07 19:35:54.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
'\" t
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2013,2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: curs_util.3x,v 1.43 2015/06/06 23:36:27 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: curs_util.3x,v 1.46 2017/01/07 19:35:54 tom Exp $
.TH curs_util 3X ""
.ie \n(.g .ds `` \(lq
.el .ds `` ``
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@
.bP
Values above 128 are either meta characters
(if the screen has not been initialized,
-or if \fBmeta\fP has been called with a \fBTRUE\fP parameter),
+or if \fBmeta\fP(3X) has been called with a \fBTRUE\fP parameter),
shown in the \fBM\-\fR\fIX\fR notation,
or are displayed as themselves.
In the latter case, the values may not be printable;
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@
It modifies the way \fBncurses\fP treats environment variables
when determining the screen size.
.bP
-Normally ncurses looks first at the terminal database for the screen size.
+Normally \fBncurses\fP looks first at the terminal database for the screen size.
.IP
If \fBuse_env\fP was called with \fBFALSE\fP for parameter,
it stops here unless
@@ -155,11 +155,11 @@
it overrides the values from the terminal database.
.bP
Finally (unless \fBuse_env\fP was called with \fBFALSE\fP parameter),
-ncurses examines the \fBLINES\fR or \fBCOLUMNS\fR environment variables,
+\fBncurses\fP examines the \fBLINES\fR or \fBCOLUMNS\fR environment variables,
using a value in those to override the results
from the operating system or terminal database.
.IP
-Ncurses also updates the screen size in response to SIGWINCH,
+\fBNcurses\fP also updates the screen size in response to SIGWINCH,
unless overridden by the \fBLINES\fR or \fBCOLUMNS\fR environment variables,
.SS use_tioctl
.PP
@@ -167,16 +167,16 @@
should be called before \fBinitscr\fR or \fBnewterm\fR are called
(because those compute the screen size).
After \fBuse_tioctl\fR is called with \fBTRUE\fR as an argument,
-ncurses modifies the last step in its computation of screen size as follows:
+\fBncurses\fP modifies the last step in its computation of screen size as follows:
.bP
checks if the \fBLINES\fR and \fBCOLUMNS\fR environment variables
are set to a number greater than zero.
.bP
-for each, ncurses updates the corresponding environment variable
+for each, \fBncurses\fP updates the corresponding environment variable
with the value that it has obtained via operating system call
or from the terminal database.
.bP
-ncurses re-fetches the value of the environment variables so that
+\fBncurses\fP re-fetches the value of the environment variables so that
it is still the environment variables which set the screen size.
.PP
The \fBuse_env\fP and \fBuse_tioctl\fP routines combine as
@@ -189,17 +189,17 @@
\fIuse_env\fR/\fIuse_tioctl\fR/\fISummary\fR
TRUE/FALSE/T{
This is the default behavior.
-ncurses uses operating system calls
+\fBncurses\fP uses operating system calls
unless overridden by $LINES or $COLUMNS environment variables.
T}
TRUE/TRUE/T{
-ncurses updates $LINES and $COLUMNS based on operating system calls.
+\fBncurses\fP updates $LINES and $COLUMNS based on operating system calls.
T}
FALSE/TRUE/T{
-ncurses ignores $LINES and $COLUMNS, uses operating system calls to obtain size.
+\fBncurses\fP ignores $LINES and $COLUMNS, uses operating system calls to obtain size.
T}
FALSE/FALSE/T{
-ncurses relies on the terminal database to determine size.
+\fBncurses\fP relies on the terminal database to determine size.
T}
.TE
.SS putwin/getwin
@@ -257,9 +257,6 @@
\fBflushinp\fR
returns an error if the terminal was not initialized.
.TP 5
-\fBmeta\fR
-returns an error if the terminal was not initialized.
-.TP 5
\fBputwin\fP
returns an error if the associated \fBfwrite\fP calls return an error.
.RE
@@ -284,9 +281,9 @@
loaded when the terminal description is read by the library.
.SS nofilter/use_tioctl
.PP
-The \fBnofilter\fP and \fBuse_tioctl\fP routines are specific to ncurses.
+The \fBnofilter\fP and \fBuse_tioctl\fP routines are specific to \fBncurses\fP.
They were not supported on Version 7, BSD or System V implementations.
-It is recommended that any code depending on ncurses extensions
+It is recommended that any code depending on \fBncurses\fP extensions
be conditioned using NCURSES_VERSION.
.SS putwin/getwin
.PP
@@ -305,7 +302,7 @@
Oddly, there are no such functions in the 4.3BSD curses sources.
.bP
Most implementations simply dump the binary \fBWINDOW\fP structure to the file.
-These include SVr4 curses, NetBSD and PDCurses, as well as older ncurses versions.
+These include SVr4 curses, NetBSD and PDCurses, as well as older \fBncurses\fP versions.
This implementation (as well as the X/Open variant of Solaris curses, dated 1995)
uses textual dumps.
.IP
@@ -355,7 +352,7 @@
The \fBuse_legacy_coding\fP function allows the caller to
change the output of \fBunctrl\fP.
.PP
-Likewise, the \fBmeta\fP function allows the caller to change the
+Likewise, the \fBmeta\fP(3X) function allows the caller to change the
output of \fBkeyname\fP, i.e.,
it determines whether to use the `M\-' prefix
for \*(``meta\*('' keys (codes in the range 128 to 255).
@@ -365,11 +362,21 @@
When treating them as \*(``meta\*('' keys
(or if \fBkeyname\fP is called before initializing curses),
this implementation returns strings \*(``M\-^@\*('', \*(``M\-^A\*('', etc.
+.SS use_env/use_tioctl
+.PP
+If \fBncurses\fP is configured to provide the sp-functions extension,
+the state of \fBuse_env\fP and \fBuse_tioctl\fP may be updated before
+creating each \fIscreen\fP rather than once only
+(\fBcurs_sp_funcs\fR(3X)).
+This feature of \fBuse_env\fP
+is not provided by other implementation of curses.
.SH SEE ALSO
\fBlegacy_coding\fR(3X),
\fBcurses\fR(3X),
\fBcurs_initscr\fR(3X),
+\fBcurs_inopts\fR(3X),
\fBcurs_kernel\fR(3X),
\fBcurs_scr_dump\fR(3X),
+\fBcurs_sp_funcs\fR(3X),
\fBcurs_variables\fR(3X),
\fBlegacy_coding\fR(3X).
Index: man/form_post.3x
Prereq: 1.10
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/form_post.3x 2015-12-05 20:41:37.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/form_post.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
'\" t
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2006,2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2010,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: form_post.3x,v 1.10 2015/12/05 20:41:37 jmc Exp $
+.\" $Id: form_post.3x,v 1.11 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.TH form_post 3X ""
.SH NAME
\fBpost_form\fR,
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
.br
.SH DESCRIPTION
The function \fBpost_form\fR displays a form to its associated subwindow. To
-trigger physical display of the subwindow, use \fBrefresh\fR or some equivalent
+trigger physical display of the subwindow, use \fBrefresh\fR(3X) or some equivalent
\fBcurses\fR routine (the implicit \fBdoupdate\fR triggered by an \fBcurses\fR
input request will do).
.PP
Index: man/manhtml.aliases
Prereq: 1.1
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/manhtml.aliases 2013-12-21 21:44:52.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/manhtml.aliases 2017-01-07 20:28:43.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,16 +1,28 @@
-# $Id: manhtml.aliases,v 1.1 2013/12/21 21:44:52 tom Exp $
+# $Id: manhtml.aliases,v 1.5 2017/01/07 20:28:43 tom Exp $
# Items in this list will be linked to the corresponding manpages by man2html
addch(3X) curs_addch(3X)
delscreen(3X) curs_initscr(3X)
+endwin(3X) curs_initscr(3X)
filter(3X) curs_util(3X)
form_fieldtype(3X) form_fieldtype(3X)
+get_wch(3X) curs_get_wch(3X)
getch(3X) curs_getch(3X)
+inch(3X) curs_inch(3X)
infocmp(1) infocmp(1M)
initscr(3X) curs_initscr(3X)
+is_scrollok(3X) curs_opaque(3X)
+keypad(3X) curs_inopts(3X)
+meta(3X) curs_inopts(3X)
newterm(3X) curs_initscr(3X)
+refresh(3X) curs_refresh(3X)
set_fieldtype(3X) form_fieldtype(3X)
set_term(3X) curs_initscr(3X)
setupterm(3X) curs_terminfo(3X)
+slk_init(3X) curs_slk(3X)
tic(1) tic(1M)
+tigetstr(3X) curs_terminfo(3X)
+tparm(3X) curs_terminfo(3X)
+tputs(3X) curs_terminfo(3X)
use_env(3X) curs_util(3X)
vidputs(3X) curs_terminfo(3X)
+wgetch(3X) curs_getch(3X)
Index: man/menu_driver.3x
Prereq: 1.20
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/menu_driver.3x 2010-12-04 18:38:55.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/menu_driver.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2008,2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2010,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: menu_driver.3x,v 1.20 2010/12/04 18:38:55 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: menu_driver.3x,v 1.21 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.TH menu_driver 3X ""
.de bP
.IP \(bu 4
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
.bP
The input is a form navigation request.
Navigation request codes are constants defined in \fB<form.h>\fP,
-which are distinct from the key- and character codes returned by \fBwgetch\fP.
+which are distinct from the key- and character codes returned by \fBwgetch\fP(3X).
.bP
The input is a printable character.
Printable characters (which must be positive, less than 256) are
Index: man/menu_post.3x
Prereq: 1.13
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/menu_post.3x 2016-10-15 17:02:31.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/menu_post.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
'\" t
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: menu_post.3x,v 1.13 2016/10/15 17:02:31 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: menu_post.3x,v 1.14 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.TH menu_post 3X ""
.SH NAME
\fBpost_menu\fR,
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
.br
.SH DESCRIPTION
The function \fBpost_menu\fR displays a menu to its associated subwindow. To
-trigger physical display of the subwindow, use \fBrefresh\fR or some equivalent
+trigger physical display of the subwindow, use \fBrefresh\fR(3X) or some equivalent
\fBcurses\fR routine (the implicit \fBdoupdate\fR triggered by an \fBcurses\fR
input request will do). \fBpost_menu\fR resets the selection status of all items.
.PP
Index: man/ncurses.3x
Prereq: 1.124
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/ncurses.3x 2015-08-08 14:57:51.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/ncurses.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
'\" t
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2014,2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: ncurses.3x,v 1.124 2015/08/08 14:57:51 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: ncurses.3x,v 1.125 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.hy 0
.TH ncurses 3X ""
.ie \n(.g .ds `` \(lq
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@
must be called to initialize the library
before any of the other routines that deal with windows
and screens are used.
-The routine \fBendwin\fR must be called before exiting.
+The routine \fBendwin\fR(3X) must be called before exiting.
.PP
To get character-at-a-time input without echoing (most
interactive, screen oriented programs want this), the following
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@
The routines not beginning
with \fBw\fR affect \fBstdscr\fR.
.PP
-After using routines to manipulate a window, \fBrefresh\fR is called,
+After using routines to manipulate a window, \fBrefresh\fR(3X) is called,
telling \fBcurses\fR to make the user's CRT screen look like
\fBstdscr\fR.
The characters in a window are actually of type
Index: man/resizeterm.3x
Prereq: 1.21
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/resizeterm.3x 2015-09-26 19:55:32.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/resizeterm.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2013,2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
.\"
.\" Author: Thomas E. Dickey 1996-on
.\"
-.\" $Id: resizeterm.3x,v 1.21 2015/09/26 19:55:32 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: resizeterm.3x,v 1.22 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.TH resizeterm 3X ""
.de bP
.IP \(bu 4
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
.bP
on receipt of a SIGWINCH, the handler sets a flag
.bP
-which is tested in \fBwgetch\fP and \fBdoupdate\fP,
+which is tested in \fBwgetch\fP(3X) and \fBdoupdate\fP,
.bP
in turn, calling the \fBresizeterm\fR function,
.bP
Index: man/term.5
Prereq: 1.24
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/term.5 2016-10-22 19:55:01.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/term.5 2017-01-07 18:45:42.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: term.5,v 1.24 2016/10/22 19:55:01 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: term.5,v 1.25 2017/01/07 18:45:42 tom Exp $
.TH term 5
.ds n 5
.ds d @TERMINFO@
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@
or sign extension are made.
.PP
The compiled file is created with the \fB@TIC@\fP program,
-and read by the routine \fBsetupterm\fP.
+and read by the routine \fBsetupterm\fP(3X).
The file is divided into six parts:
the header,
terminal names,
Index: man/term_variables.3x
Prereq: 1.7
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/term_variables.3x 2015-12-05 18:43:25.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/term_variables.3x 2017-01-07 19:25:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 2011-2013,2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 2011-2015,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: term_variables.3x,v 1.7 2015/12/05 18:43:25 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: term_variables.3x,v 1.8 2017/01/07 19:25:15 tom Exp $
.TH term_variables 3X ""
.ds n 5
.na
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@
It is possible to save a value of \fBcur_term\fP for subsequent
use as a parameter to \fBset_term\fP, for switching between screens.
Alternatively, one can save the return value from \fBnewterm\fP
-or \fBsetupterm\fP to reuse in \fBset_term\fP.
+or \fBsetupterm\fP(3X) to reuse in \fBset_term\fP.
.SS Terminfo Names
The \fB@TIC@\fP(1) and \fB@INFOCMP@\fP(1) programs use lookup tables for
the long and short names of terminfo capabilities,
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@
.\"
.SS Terminal Type
On initialization of the curses or terminfo interfaces,
-\fBsetupterm\fP copies the terminal name to the array \fBttytype\fP.
+\fBsetupterm\fP(3X) copies the terminal name to the array \fBttytype\fP.
.\"
.SS Terminfo Names
.PP
Index: man/terminfo.tail
Prereq: 1.75
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/terminfo.tail 2016-12-24 22:54:11.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/terminfo.tail 2017-01-07 18:32:49.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-.\" $Id: terminfo.tail,v 1.75 2016/12/24 22:54:11 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: terminfo.tail,v 1.76 2017/01/07 18:32:49 tom Exp $
.\" Beginning of terminfo.tail file
.\" This file is part of ncurses.
.\" See "terminfo.head" for copyright.
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@
.PP
A delay in milliseconds may appear anywhere in a string capability, enclosed in
$<..> brackets, as in \fBel\fP=\eEK$<5>,
-and padding characters are supplied by \fBtputs\fP
+and padding characters are supplied by \fBtputs\fP(3X)
to provide this delay.
.bP
The delay must be a number with at most one decimal
@@ -434,7 +434,7 @@
.IP
The terms "static" and "dynamic" are misleading.
Historically, these are simply two different sets of variables,
-whose values are not reset between calls to \fBtparm\fP.
+whose values are not reset between calls to \fBtparm\fP(3X).
However, that fact is not documented in other implementations.
Relying on it will adversely impact portability to other implementations.
.TP
@@ -1374,7 +1374,7 @@
If the terminal
supports other escape sequences to set background and foreground, they should
be coded as \fBsetf\fR and \fBsetb\fR, respectively.
-The \fBvidputs\fR and the \fBrefresh\fP functions
+The \fBvidputs\fR and the \fBrefresh\fP(3X) functions
use the \fBsetaf\fR and \fBsetab\fR capabilities if they are defined.
.PP
The \fBsetaf\fR/\fBsetab\fR and \fBsetf\fR/\fBsetb\fR capabilities take a
Index: man/tput.1
Prereq: 1.46
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/tput.1 2016-10-22 19:57:25.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/tput.1 2017-01-07 23:03:28.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
'\" t
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2012,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: tput.1,v 1.46 2016/10/22 19:57:25 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: tput.1,v 1.50 2017/01/07 23:03:28 tom Exp $
.TH @TPUT@ 1 ""
.ds d @TERMINFO@
.ds n 1
@@ -133,32 +133,83 @@
.RS
.TP 5
(1)
-if present, the terminal's initialization strings will be
-output as detailed in the \fBterminfo\fR(5) section on
-.IR "Tabs and Initialization" ,
+first, \fB@TPUT@\fR retrieves the current terminal mode settings
+for your terminal.
+It does this by successively testing
+.RS
+.bP
+the standard error,
+.bP
+standard output,
+.bP
+standard input and
+.bP
+ultimately \*(lq/dev/tty\*(rq
+.RE
+.IP
+to obtain terminal settings.
+Having retrieved these settings, \fB@TPUT@\fP remembers which
+file descriptor to use when updating settings.
.TP
(2)
-any delays (e.g., newline) specified in the entry will
-be set in the tty driver,
+if the window size cannot be obtained from the operating system,
+but the terminal description (or environment, e.g., \fBLINES\fP
+and \fBCOLUMNS\fP variables specify this),
+update the operating system's notion of the window size.
.TP
(3)
+the terminal modes will be updated:
+.RS
+.bP
+any delays (e.g., newline) specified in the entry will
+be set in the tty driver,
+.bP
tabs expansion will be turned on or off according to
the specification in the entry, and
-.TP
-(4)
+.bP
if tabs are not expanded,
standard tabs will be set (every 8 spaces).
.RE
+.TP
+(4)
+if present, the terminal's initialization strings will be
+output as detailed in the \fBterminfo\fR(5) section on
+.IR "Tabs and Initialization" ,
+.TP
+(5)
+output is flushed.
+.RE
.IP
If an entry does not
contain the information needed for any of these activities,
that activity will silently be skipped.
.TP
\fBreset\fR
-Instead of putting out initialization strings, the terminal's
-reset strings will be output if present (\fBrs1\fR, \fBrs2\fR, \fBrs3\fR, \fBrf\fR).
-If the reset strings are not present, but initialization
-strings are, the initialization strings will be output.
+This is similar to \fBinit\fP, with two differences:
+.RS
+.TP 5
+(1)
+before any other initialization,
+the terminal modes will be reset to a \*(``sane\*('' state:
+.RS
+.bP
+set cooked and echo modes,
+.bP
+turn off cbreak and raw modes,
+.bP
+turn on newline translation and
+.bP
+reset any unset special characters to their default values
+.RE
+.TP 5
+(2)
+Instead of putting out \fIinitialization\fP strings, the terminal's
+\fIreset\fP strings will be output if present
+(\fBrs1\fR, \fBrs2\fR, \fBrs3\fR, \fBrf\fR).
+If the \fIreset\fP strings are not present, but \fIinitialization\fP
+strings are, the \fIinitialization\fP strings will be output.
+.RE
+.IP
Otherwise, \fBreset\fR acts identically to \fBinit\fR.
.TP
\fBlongname\fR
@@ -188,6 +239,20 @@
The \fBreset\fP program is usually an alias for \fB@TSET@\fP,
because of this difference with resetting terminal modes and special characters.
.PP
+With the changes made for ncurses 6.1, the \fIreset\fP feature of the
+two programs is (mostly) the same. A few differences remain:
+.bP
+The \fB@TSET@\fP program waits one second when resetting,
+in case it happens to be a hardware terminal.
+.bP
+The two programs write the terminal initialization strings
+to different streams (i.e.,. the standard error for \fB@TSET@\fP and the
+standard output for \fB@TPUT@\fP).
+.IP
+\fBNote:\fP although these programs write to different streams,
+redirecting their output to a file will capture only part of their actions.
+The changes to the terminal modes are not affected by redirecting the output.
+.PP
If \fB@TPUT@\fR is invoked by a link named \fBinit\fR, this has the
same effect as \fB@TPUT@ init\fR.
Again, you are less likely to use that link because another program
Index: man/tset.1
Prereq: 1.43
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/man/tset.1 2016-08-06 23:16:39.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/man/tset.1 2017-01-07 22:59:51.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2013,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
.\" *
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
.\" authorization. *
.\"***************************************************************************
.\"
-.\" $Id: tset.1,v 1.43 2016/08/06 23:16:39 tom Exp $
+.\" $Id: tset.1,v 1.47 2017/01/07 22:59:51 tom Exp $
.TH @TSET@ 1 ""
.ie \n(.g .ds `` \(lq
.el .ds `` ``
@@ -83,29 +83,61 @@
Then, if the terminal type begins with a question mark (\*(``?\*(''), the
user is prompted for confirmation of the terminal type. An empty
response confirms the type, or, another type can be entered to specify
-a new type. Once the terminal type has been determined, the terminfo
-entry for the terminal is retrieved. If no terminfo entry is found
+a new type.
+Once the terminal type has been determined,
+the terminal description for the terminal is retrieved.
+If no terminal description is found
for the type, the user is prompted for another terminal type.
.PP
-Once the terminfo entry is retrieved, the window size, backspace, interrupt
-and line kill characters (among many other things) are set and the terminal
-and tab initialization strings are sent to the standard error output.
+Once the terminal description is retrieved,
+.bP
+if the \*(``\fB\-w\fP\*('' option is enabled, \fB@TSET@\fP may update
+the terminal's window size.
+.IP
+If the window size cannot be obtained from the operating system,
+but the terminal description (or environment, e.g., \fBLINES\fP
+and \fBCOLUMNS\fP variables specify this),
+use this to set the operating system's notion of the window size.
+.bP
+if the \*(``\fB\-c\fP\*('' option is enabled,
+the backspace, interrupt and line kill characters (among many other things) are set
+.bP
+unless the \*(``\fB\-I\fP\*('' option is enabled,
+the terminal
+and tab \fIinitialization\fP strings are sent to the standard error output,
+and \fB@TSET@\fP waits one second (in case a hardware reset was issued).
+.bP
Finally, if the erase, interrupt and line kill characters have changed,
or are not set to their default values, their values are displayed to the
standard error output.
.SS reset - reinitialization
.PP
-When invoked as \fB@RESET@\fR, \fB@TSET@\fR sets cooked and echo modes,
-turns off cbreak and raw modes, turns on newline translation and
-resets any unset special characters to their default values before
-doing the terminal initialization described above. This is useful
-after a program dies leaving a terminal in an abnormal state. Note,
+When invoked as \fB@RESET@\fR, \fB@TSET@\fR sets the terminal
+modes to \*(``sane\*('' values:
+.bP
+sets cooked and echo modes,
+.bP
+turns off cbreak and raw modes,
+.bP
+turns on newline translation and
+.bP
+resets any unset special characters to their default values
+.PP
+before
+doing the terminal initialization described above.
+Also, rather than using the terminal \fIinitialization\fP strings,
+it uses the terminal \fIreset\fP strings.
+.PP
+The \fB@RESET@\fP command is useful
+after a program dies leaving a terminal in an abnormal state:
+.bP
you may have to type
.sp
\fI<LF>\fP\fB@RESET@\fP\fI<LF>\fP
.sp
(the line-feed character is normally control-J) to get the terminal
to work, as carriage-return may no longer work in the abnormal state.
+.bP
Also, the terminal will often not echo the command.
.SH OPTIONS
.PP
@@ -156,7 +188,7 @@
reports the version of ncurses which was used in this program, and exits.
.TP
.B \-w
-Resize the window to match the size deduced via \fBsetupterm\fP.
+Resize the window to match the size deduced via \fBsetupterm\fP(3X).
Normally this has no effect,
unless \fBsetupterm\fP is not able to detect the window size.
.PP
@@ -250,8 +282,9 @@
that he began work in October 1977,
continuing development over the next few years.
.PP
-In 1980, Eric Allman modified \fBtset\fP to provide a \*(lqreset\*(rq
+In September 1980, Eric Allman modified \fBtset\fP to provide a \*(lqreset\*(rq
feature when the program was invoked as \fBreset\fP.
+This version appeared in 4.1cBSD, late in 1982.
.PP
The \fBncurses\fR implementation
was lightly adapted from the 4.4BSD sources for a terminfo environment by Eric
Index: ncurses/base/MKlib_gen.sh
Prereq: 1.55
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/ncurses/base/MKlib_gen.sh 2016-12-11 00:07:14.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/ncurses/base/MKlib_gen.sh 2017-01-07 16:02:47.000000000 +0000
@@ -2,10 +2,10 @@
#
# MKlib_gen.sh -- generate sources from curses.h macro definitions
#
-# ($Id: MKlib_gen.sh,v 1.55 2016/12/11 00:07:14 tom Exp $)
+# ($Id: MKlib_gen.sh,v 1.56 2017/01/07 16:02:47 tom Exp $)
#
##############################################################################
-# Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. #
+# Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. #
# #
# Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a #
# copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), #
@@ -399,9 +399,10 @@
cat >$AW2 <<EOF1
BEGIN {
+ printf "/* This file was generated by $0 */\n"
+ print ""
print "/*"
print " * DO NOT EDIT THIS FILE BY HAND!"
- printf " * It is generated by $0 %s.\n", "$USE"
if ( "$USE" == "generated" ) {
print " *"
print " * This is a file of trivial functions generated from macro"
Index: ncurses/curses.priv.h
Prereq: 1.554
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/ncurses/curses.priv.h 2016-11-21 23:28:54.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/ncurses/curses.priv.h 2017-01-07 19:45:37.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@
****************************************************************************/
/*
- * $Id: curses.priv.h,v 1.554 2016/11/21 23:28:54 tom Exp $
+ * $Id: curses.priv.h,v 1.557 2017/01/07 19:45:37 tom Exp $
*
* curses.priv.h
*
@@ -939,6 +939,9 @@
#if USE_PTHREADS_EINTR
pthread_t read_thread; /* The reading thread */
#endif
+#if USE_WIDEC_SUPPORT
+ char key_name[MB_LEN_MAX + 1];
+#endif
} NCURSES_GLOBALS;
extern NCURSES_EXPORT_VAR(NCURSES_GLOBALS) _nc_globals;
@@ -1248,6 +1251,10 @@
ripoff_t rippedoff[N_RIPS];
ripoff_t *rsp;
+#if NCURSES_SP_FUNCS
+ bool use_tioctl;
+#endif
+
/*
* ncurses/ncursesw are the same up to this point.
*/
@@ -1258,8 +1265,6 @@
bool _screen_acs_fix;
bool _screen_unicode;
#endif
-
- bool _use_tioctl;
};
extern NCURSES_EXPORT_VAR(SCREEN *) _nc_screen_chain;
Index: ncurses/tinfo/MKfallback.sh
Prereq: 1.16
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/ncurses/tinfo/MKfallback.sh 2016-09-17 21:28:03.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/ncurses/tinfo/MKfallback.sh 2017-01-07 16:05:16.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
#!/bin/sh
##############################################################################
-# Copyright (c) 1998-2010,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. #
+# Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. #
# #
# Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a #
# copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), #
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
# use or other dealings in this Software without prior written #
# authorization. #
##############################################################################
-# $Id: MKfallback.sh,v 1.16 2016/09/17 21:28:03 tom Exp $
+# $Id: MKfallback.sh,v 1.17 2017/01/07 16:05:16 tom Exp $
#
# MKfallback.sh -- create fallback table for entry reads
#
@@ -69,8 +69,10 @@
fi
cat <<EOF
+/* This file was generated by $0 */
+
/*
- * DO NOT EDIT THIS FILE BY HAND! It is generated by MKfallback.sh.
+ * DO NOT EDIT THIS FILE BY HAND!
*/
#include <curses.priv.h>
Index: ncurses/tinfo/lib_data.c
Prereq: 1.68
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/ncurses/tinfo/lib_data.c 2016-11-21 23:29:14.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/ncurses/tinfo/lib_data.c 2017-01-07 19:51:37.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2013,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@
#include <curses.priv.h>
-MODULE_ID("$Id: lib_data.c,v 1.68 2016/11/21 23:29:14 tom Exp $")
+MODULE_ID("$Id: lib_data.c,v 1.69 2017/01/07 19:51:37 tom Exp $")
/*
* OS/2's native linker complains if we don't initialize public data when
@@ -204,6 +204,9 @@
#if USE_PTHREADS_EINTR
0, /* read_thread */
#endif
+#if USE_WIDEC_SUPPORT
+ CHARS_0s, /* key_name */
+#endif
};
#define STACK_FRAME_0 { { 0 }, 0 }
@@ -371,7 +374,7 @@
if ((pthread_sigmask))
return pthread_sigmask(how, newmask, oldmask);
else
- return (sigprocmask)(how, newmask, oldmask);
+ return (sigprocmask) (how, newmask, oldmask);
}
#endif
#endif /* USE_PTHREADS */
Index: ncurses/tinfo/lib_setup.c
Prereq: 1.167
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/ncurses/tinfo/lib_setup.c 2016-09-10 20:07:30.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/ncurses/tinfo/lib_setup.c 2017-01-07 16:50:16.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
#include <locale.h>
#endif
-MODULE_ID("$Id: lib_setup.c,v 1.167 2016/09/10 20:07:30 tom Exp $")
+MODULE_ID("$Id: lib_setup.c,v 1.170 2017/01/07 16:50:16 tom Exp $")
/****************************************************************************
*
@@ -220,9 +220,9 @@
NCURSES_EXPORT(void)
NCURSES_SP_NAME(use_env) (NCURSES_SP_DCLx bool f)
{
+ START_TRACE();
T((T_CALLED("use_env(%p,%d)"), (void *) SP_PARM, (int) f));
#if NCURSES_SP_FUNCS
- START_TRACE();
if (IsPreScreen(SP_PARM)) {
SP_PARM->_use_env = f;
}
@@ -235,11 +235,11 @@
NCURSES_EXPORT(void)
NCURSES_SP_NAME(use_tioctl) (NCURSES_SP_DCLx bool f)
{
+ START_TRACE();
T((T_CALLED("use_tioctl(%p,%d)"), (void *) SP_PARM, (int) f));
#if NCURSES_SP_FUNCS
- START_TRACE();
if (IsPreScreen(SP_PARM)) {
- SP_PARM->_use_tioctl = f;
+ SP_PARM->use_tioctl = f;
}
#else
_nc_prescreen.use_tioctl = f;
@@ -251,8 +251,8 @@
NCURSES_EXPORT(void)
use_env(bool f)
{
- T((T_CALLED("use_env(%d)"), (int) f));
START_TRACE();
+ T((T_CALLED("use_env(%d)"), (int) f));
_nc_prescreen.use_env = f;
returnVoid;
}
@@ -260,8 +260,8 @@
NCURSES_EXPORT(void)
use_tioctl(bool f)
{
- T((T_CALLED("use_tioctl(%d)"), (int) f));
START_TRACE();
+ T((T_CALLED("use_tioctl(%d)"), (int) f));
_nc_prescreen.use_tioctl = f;
returnVoid;
}
@@ -297,6 +297,8 @@
#else /* !USE_TERM_DRIVER */
TERMINAL *termp = cur_term;
int my_tabsize;
+ bool useEnv = _nc_prescreen.use_env;
+ bool useTioctl = _nc_prescreen.use_tioctl;
/* figure out the size of the screen */
T(("screen size: terminfo lines = %d columns = %d", lines, columns));
@@ -304,7 +306,14 @@
*linep = (int) lines;
*colp = (int) columns;
- if (_nc_prescreen.use_env || _nc_prescreen.use_tioctl) {
+#if NCURSES_SP_FUNCS
+ if (sp) {
+ useEnv = sp->_use_env;
+ useTioctl = sp->use_tioctl;
+ }
+#endif
+
+ if (useEnv || useTioctl) {
#ifdef __EMX__
{
int screendata[2];
@@ -338,10 +347,10 @@
}
#endif /* HAVE_SIZECHANGE */
- if (_nc_prescreen.use_env) {
+ if (useEnv) {
int value;
- if (_nc_prescreen.use_tioctl) {
+ if (useTioctl) {
/*
* If environment variables are used, update them.
*/
Index: ncurses/tinfo/tinfo_driver.c
Prereq: 1.43
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/ncurses/tinfo/tinfo_driver.c 2016-12-24 23:20:08.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/ncurses/tinfo/tinfo_driver.c 2017-01-07 16:34:52.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 2008-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 2008-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@
# endif
#endif
-MODULE_ID("$Id: tinfo_driver.c,v 1.43 2016/12/24 23:20:08 tom Exp $")
+MODULE_ID("$Id: tinfo_driver.c,v 1.44 2017/01/07 16:34:52 tom Exp $")
/*
* SCO defines TIOCGSIZE and the corresponding struct. Other systems (SunOS,
@@ -397,7 +397,7 @@
if (sp) {
useEnv = sp->_use_env;
- useTioctl = sp->_use_tioctl;
+ useTioctl = sp->use_tioctl;
} else {
useEnv = _nc_prescreen.use_env;
useTioctl = _nc_prescreen.use_tioctl;
Index: ncurses/widechar/lib_key_name.c
Prereq: 1.3
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/ncurses/widechar/lib_key_name.c 2008-10-11 20:15:14.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/ncurses/widechar/lib_key_name.c 2017-01-07 19:50:17.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 2007,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -35,7 +35,9 @@
#include <curses.priv.h>
-MODULE_ID("$Id: lib_key_name.c,v 1.3 2008/10/11 20:15:14 tom Exp $")
+MODULE_ID("$Id: lib_key_name.c,v 1.4 2017/01/07 19:50:17 tom Exp $")
+
+#define MyData _nc_globals.key_name
NCURSES_EXPORT(NCURSES_CONST char *)
key_name(wchar_t c)
@@ -44,19 +46,16 @@
wchar_t *my_wchars;
size_t len;
- /* FIXME: move to _nc_globals */
- static char result[MB_LEN_MAX + 1];
-
memset(&my_cchar, 0, sizeof(my_cchar));
my_cchar.chars[0] = c;
my_cchar.chars[1] = L'\0';
my_wchars = wunctrl(&my_cchar);
- len = wcstombs(result, my_wchars, sizeof(result) - 1);
+ len = wcstombs(MyData, my_wchars, sizeof(MyData) - 1);
if (isEILSEQ(len) || (len == 0)) {
return 0;
}
- result[len] = '\0';
- return result;
+ MyData[len] = '\0';
+ return MyData;
}
Index: package/debian-mingw/changelog
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/package/debian-mingw/changelog 2016-12-31 12:01:55.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/package/debian-mingw/changelog 2017-01-07 15:27:12.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-ncurses6 (6.0+20161231) unstable; urgency=low
+ncurses6 (6.0+20170107) unstable; urgency=low
* latest weekly patch
- -- Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@invisible-island.net> Sat, 31 Dec 2016 07:01:56 -0500
+ -- Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@invisible-island.net> Sat, 07 Jan 2017 10:27:12 -0500
ncurses6 (5.9-20131005) unstable; urgency=low
Index: package/debian-mingw/copyright
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/package/debian-mingw/copyright 2016-01-02 20:24:37.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/package/debian-mingw/copyright 2017-01-08 00:35:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -5,11 +5,11 @@
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Files: *
-Copyright: 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright: 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Licence: X11
Files: aclocal.m4 package
-Copyright: 1996-2015,2016 by Thomas E. Dickey
+Copyright: 1996-2016,2017 by Thomas E. Dickey
Licence: X11
Files: doc/html/NCURSES-Programming-HOWTO.html
Index: package/debian-mingw64/changelog
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/package/debian-mingw64/changelog 2016-12-31 12:01:55.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/package/debian-mingw64/changelog 2017-01-07 15:27:12.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-ncurses6 (6.0+20161231) unstable; urgency=low
+ncurses6 (6.0+20170107) unstable; urgency=low
* latest weekly patch
- -- Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@invisible-island.net> Sat, 31 Dec 2016 07:01:56 -0500
+ -- Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@invisible-island.net> Sat, 07 Jan 2017 10:27:12 -0500
ncurses6 (5.9-20131005) unstable; urgency=low
Index: package/debian-mingw64/copyright
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/package/debian-mingw64/copyright 2016-01-02 20:24:37.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/package/debian-mingw64/copyright 2017-01-08 00:35:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -5,11 +5,11 @@
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Files: *
-Copyright: 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright: 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Licence: X11
Files: aclocal.m4 package
-Copyright: 1996-2015,2016 by Thomas E. Dickey
+Copyright: 1996-2016,2017 by Thomas E. Dickey
Licence: X11
Files: doc/html/NCURSES-Programming-HOWTO.html
Index: package/debian/changelog
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/package/debian/changelog 2016-12-31 12:01:55.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/package/debian/changelog 2017-01-07 15:27:12.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-ncurses6 (6.0+20161231) unstable; urgency=low
+ncurses6 (6.0+20170107) unstable; urgency=low
* latest weekly patch
- -- Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@invisible-island.net> Sat, 31 Dec 2016 07:01:56 -0500
+ -- Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@invisible-island.net> Sat, 07 Jan 2017 10:27:12 -0500
ncurses6 (5.9-20120608) unstable; urgency=low
Index: package/debian/copyright
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/package/debian/copyright 2016-01-02 20:24:37.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/package/debian/copyright 2017-01-08 00:35:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -5,11 +5,11 @@
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Files: *
-Copyright: 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright: 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Licence: X11
Files: aclocal.m4 package
-Copyright: 1996-2015,2016 by Thomas E. Dickey
+Copyright: 1996-2016,2017 by Thomas E. Dickey
Licence: X11
Files: doc/html/NCURSES-Programming-HOWTO.html
Index: package/mingw-ncurses.nsi
Prereq: 1.191
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/package/mingw-ncurses.nsi 2016-12-31 12:01:55.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/package/mingw-ncurses.nsi 2017-01-07 15:27:12.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-; $Id: mingw-ncurses.nsi,v 1.191 2016/12/31 12:01:55 tom Exp $
+; $Id: mingw-ncurses.nsi,v 1.192 2017/01/07 15:27:12 tom Exp $
; TODO add examples
; TODO bump ABI to 6
@@ -9,8 +9,8 @@
!define VERSION_MAJOR "6"
!define VERSION_MINOR "0"
-!define VERSION_YYYY "2016"
-!define VERSION_MMDD "1231"
+!define VERSION_YYYY "2017"
+!define VERSION_MMDD "0107"
!define VERSION_PATCH ${VERSION_YYYY}${VERSION_MMDD}
!define MY_ABI "5"
Index: package/mingw-ncurses.spec
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/package/mingw-ncurses.spec 2016-12-31 12:01:55.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/package/mingw-ncurses.spec 2017-01-07 15:27:12.000000000 +0000
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
Summary: shared libraries for terminal handling
Name: mingw32-ncurses6
Version: 6.0
-Release: 20161231
+Release: 20170107
License: X11
Group: Development/Libraries
Source: ncurses-%{version}-%{release}.tgz
Index: package/ncurses.spec
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/package/ncurses.spec 2016-12-31 12:01:55.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/package/ncurses.spec 2017-01-07 15:27:12.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
Summary: shared libraries for terminal handling
Name: ncurses6
Version: 6.0
-Release: 20161231
+Release: 20170107
License: X11
Group: Development/Libraries
Source: ncurses-%{version}-%{release}.tgz
Index: progs/tput.c
Prereq: 1.65
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/progs/tput.c 2016-12-24 18:44:32.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/progs/tput.c 2017-01-07 23:08:24.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
#include <transform.h>
#include <tty_settings.h>
-MODULE_ID("$Id: tput.c,v 1.65 2016/12/24 18:44:32 tom Exp $")
+MODULE_ID("$Id: tput.c,v 1.68 2017/01/07 23:08:24 tom Exp $")
#define PUTS(s) fputs(s, stdout)
@@ -135,8 +135,12 @@
int intrchar = -1; /* new interrupt character */
int tkillchar = -1; /* new kill character */
- reset_start(stdout, is_reset, is_init);
- reset_tty_settings(fd, saved_settings);
+ if (is_reset) {
+ reset_start(stdout, TRUE, FALSE);
+ reset_tty_settings(fd, saved_settings);
+ } else {
+ reset_start(stdout, FALSE, TRUE);
+ }
#if HAVE_SIZECHANGE
set_window_size(fd, &lines, &columns);
Index: progs/tset.c
Prereq: 1.115
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/progs/tset.c 2016-12-24 18:46:42.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/progs/tset.c 2017-01-07 22:48:20.000000000 +0000
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/****************************************************************************
- * Copyright (c) 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
+ * Copyright (c) 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
* *
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
* copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@
char *ttyname(int fd);
#endif
-MODULE_ID("$Id: tset.c,v 1.115 2016/12/24 18:46:42 tom Exp $")
+MODULE_ID("$Id: tset.c,v 1.116 2017/01/07 22:48:20 tom Exp $")
#ifndef environ
extern char **environ;
@@ -837,7 +837,7 @@
reset_start(stderr, TRUE, FALSE);
reset_tty_settings(my_fd, &mode);
} else {
- reset_start(stderr, FALSE, FALSE);
+ reset_start(stderr, FALSE, TRUE);
}
ttype = get_termcap_entry(my_fd, *argv);
Index: test/package/debian-mingw/copyright
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/test/package/debian-mingw/copyright 2016-01-02 20:24:37.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/test/package/debian-mingw/copyright 2017-01-08 00:35:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -4,11 +4,11 @@
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Files: *
-Copyright: 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright: 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Licence: X11
Files: aclocal.m4 package
-Copyright: 2003-2015,2016 by Thomas E. Dickey
+Copyright: 2003-2016,2017 by Thomas E. Dickey
Licence: X11
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
Index: test/package/debian-mingw64/copyright
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/test/package/debian-mingw64/copyright 2016-01-02 20:24:37.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/test/package/debian-mingw64/copyright 2017-01-08 00:35:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -4,11 +4,11 @@
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Files: *
-Copyright: 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright: 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Licence: X11
Files: aclocal.m4 package
-Copyright: 2003-2015,2016 by Thomas E. Dickey
+Copyright: 2003-2016,2017 by Thomas E. Dickey
Licence: X11
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
Index: test/package/debian/copyright
--- ncurses-6.0-20161231+/test/package/debian/copyright 2016-01-02 20:24:37.000000000 +0000
+++ ncurses-6.0-20170107/test/package/debian/copyright 2017-01-08 00:35:15.000000000 +0000
@@ -4,11 +4,11 @@
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Files: *
-Copyright: 1998-2015,2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright: 1998-2016,2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Licence: X11
Files: aclocal.m4 package
-Copyright: 2003-2015,2016 by Thomas E. Dickey
+Copyright: 2003-2016,2017 by Thomas E. Dickey
Licence: X11
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
Reference in New Issue View Git Blame Copy Permalink